UNITED STATES SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
Washington, D.C. 20549


Form 10-K


 

 

þ

ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

 

 

 

For the year ended June 30, 2009

 

 

or

 

 

o

TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934


 

 

 

Commission file number: 001-33506

 

SHORETEL, INC.

(Exact name of Registrant as specified in its charter)

 

 

 

Delaware

3661

77-0443568

(State or other jurisdiction of

(Primary standard

(I.R.S. employer

incorporation or organization)

industrial code number)

identification no.)

 

 

 

960 Stewart Drive
Sunnyvale, CA 94085-3913
(408) 331-3300

(Address, including zip code, and telephone number, including area code, of Registrant’s principal executive offices)

Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:

None.

 

Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act:
Shares of Common Stock, $0.001 par value

          Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act.   Yes o    No þ

          Indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or Section 15(d) of the Act.   Yes o    No þ

          Indicate by check mark whether the registrant: (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.    Yes þ    No o

          Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically and posted on its corporate Web site, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files).    Yes o    No  o

          Indicate by check mark if disclosure of delinquent filers pursuant to Item 405 of Regulation S-K is not contained herein, and will not be contained, to the best of registrant’s knowledge, in definitive proxy or information statements incorporated by reference in Part III of this Form 10-K or any amendment to this Form 10-K.      þ

          Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, or a non-accelerated filer. See definition of “accelerated filer and large accelerated filer” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act (Check one):

 

 

 

 

Large accelerated filer o

Accelerated Filer þ

 

Non-accelerated filer o

Smaller reporting company o

 

(do not check if a smaller reporting company)

 

          Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Act).   Yes o   No þ

          The aggregate market value of the voting stock held by non-affiliates of the registrant as of December 31, 2008 was approximately $68.5 million (based on the last reported sale price of $4.49 on December 31, 2008 on The NASDAQ Global Select Market). This calculation does not reflect a determination that persons are affiliates for any other purposes. Shares of stock held by ten percent stockholders have been excluded from this calculation as they may be deemed affiliates.

          The number of shares outstanding of the registrant’s common stock as of September 2, 2009 was 44,426,218.

DOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE

          Portions of the Proxy Statement for the Annual Meeting of Stockholders (the “Proxy Statement”) to be held on November 4, 2009, and to be filed pursuant to Regulation 14A within 120 days after registrant’s fiscal year ended June 30, 2009 are incorporated by reference into Part III of this Report.



TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Page

 

 

 


 

PART I

 

 

Item 1

Business

 

4

Item 1A

Risk Factors

 

10

Item 1B

Unresolved Staff Comments

 

22

Item 2

Properties

 

22

Item 3

Legal Proceedings

 

22

Item 4

Submission of Matters to a Vote of Security Holders

 

22

 

 

 

 

 

PART II

 

 

Item 5

Market for Our Common Stock and Related Stockholder Matters

 

23

Item 6

Selected Consolidated Financial Data

 

25

Item 7

Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations

 

26

Item 7A

Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk

 

38

Item 8

Financial Statements and Supplementary Data

 

40

Item 9

Changes in and Disagreements with Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure

 

64

Item 9A

Controls and Procedures

 

64

Item 9B

Other Information

 

66

 

 

 

 

 

PART III

 

 

Item 10

Directors and Executive Officers of the Registrant and Corporate Governance

 

66

Item 11

Executive Compensation

 

66

Item 12

Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management and Related Stockholder Matters

 

66

Item 13

Certain Relationships and Related Transactions, Director Independence

 

66

Item 14

Principal Accountant Fees and Services

 

66

 

 

 

 

 

PART IV

 

 

Item 15

Exhibits and Financial Statement Schedules

 

66

Signatures

 

67



TRADEMARKS

          The ShoreTel logo, ShoreTel, ShoreCare, ShoreGear, ShorePhone, and ShoreWare are registered trademarks of ShoreTel, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. Brilliantly Simple and Brilliantly Simple Communication are trademarks of ShoreTel, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. All other trademarks, trade names and service marks herein are the property of their respective owners.

AVAILABLE INFORMATION

          Our Internet address is www.shoretel.com. On our Internet website, we make publicly available free of charge our annual report on Form 10-K, quarterly reports on Form 10-Q, current reports on Form 8-K, and amendments to those reports filed or furnished pursuant to Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 as soon as reasonably practicable after we electronically file such material with, or furnish it to, the Securities and Exchange Commission.

          In addition, the public may read and copy any materials we file with the SEC at the SEC’s Public Reference Room at 100 F Street, N.E., Washington, D.C. 20549. You may obtain information on the operation of the Public Reference Room by calling the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330. The SEC maintains an Internet site that contains reports, proxy and information statements, and other information regarding issuers that file electronically with the SEC at http://www.sec.gov.

          The charters of our Audit Committee, our Compensation Committee and our Governance and Nominating Committee, as well as our Code of Business Conduct and Ethics, are available on the Investor Relations section of our website under “Corporate Governance.” This information is also available by writing to us at the address on the cover of this Annual Report on Form 10-K.

3


          This report contains “forward-looking statements” within the meaning of Section 27A of the Securities Act of 1933 and Section 21E of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934. Forward-looking statements relate to expectations concerning matters that are not historical facts. Words such as “projects,” “believes,” “anticipates,” “plans,” “expects,” “intends” and similar words and expressions are intended to identify forward-looking statements. While we believe that the expectations reflected in the forward-looking statements are reasonable, we cannot assure you that those expectations will prove to be correct. Important factors that could cause our actual results to differ materially from those expectations are disclosed in this report, including, without limitation, in the “Risk Factors” described in Part I, Item 1A. All forward-looking statements are expressly qualified in their entirety by these factors and all related cautionary statements. We do not undertake any obligation to update any forward-looking statements.

 

 

ITEM 1.

BUSINESS

Overview

          We are a leading provider of Internet Protocol, or IP, unified communications systems for enterprises. Our systems are based on our distributed software architecture and switch-based hardware platform which enable multi-site enterprises to be served by a single system. Our systems enable a single point of management, easy installation and a high degree of scalability and reliability, and provide end users with a consistent, full suite of features across the enterprise, regardless of location. As a result, we believe our systems enable enhanced end user productivity and provide lower total cost of ownership and higher customer satisfaction than alternative systems.

          Our solution is comprised of ShoreGear switches, ShorePhone IP telephones and ShoreWare software applications. We provide our systems to enterprises across all industries, including to small, medium and large companies and public institutions. Our enterprise customers include multi-site Fortune 500 companies. As of June 30, 2009, we had sold our IP unified communications systems to approximately 11,000 enterprise customers. We sell our systems through our extensive network of over 700 channel partners.

          We have achieved broad industry recognition for our technology and high customer satisfaction. Our enterprise IP unified communications systems have been voted “Best in Show” for the last three years at the industry’s flagship tradeshow, VoiceCon. For the last five years, IT executives surveyed by Nemertes Research, an independent research firm, have rated ShoreTel highest in customer satisfaction among leading enterprise unified communications systems providers.

          We were originally incorporated in California in September 1996, and reincorporated into Delaware in June 2007.

Products

          We provide a switch-based business communications systems for the enterprise. Our solutions are based on our distributed software architecture and appliance-based hardware platform that enable a single system to serve multi-site enterprises. This architecture provides high network reliability and allows for a single view of management and administration across all sites of a multi-site enterprise. System administrators can make changes anywhere throughout the system through a web browser interface that presents a user-friendly view of the system’s configuration. Our architecture also provides end users with a consistent and full set of features across an enterprise, regardless of location.

          We introduced our first suite of products in 1998 and have continued to add features and functionality throughout our history. Our bundled solution is comprised of ShoreGear switches, ShorePhone IP phones and ShoreWare software applications. As new software versions of our solution have been released, existing enterprise customers have been able to upgrade their switches, phones and applications, allowing them to preserve their ShoreTel investment.

          ShoreGear switches. Our switches provide call management functionality, and each switch in the system is capable of independently establishing and terminating calls without relying on a centralized call control server. As a result, enterprise unified communications can survive a variety of LAN, WAN and hardware failures. The high reliability of our switches is enhanced by two key design features: the use of flash memory in lieu of disk drives and running an embedded operating system optimized for real-time processing, such as call management. Unlike disk drives, flash memory does not rely on mechanical movement, and therefore is less likely to break down and cause our systems to fail. Furthermore, our embedded operating system enables a higher performing and more reliable software platform relative to server-centric IP systems because it is optimized for real-time processing. The reliability of the system can be further improved by adding an additional switch to the HQ location to create “n+1” redundancy, rather than requiring a dedicated back-up switch for each primary switch to improve reliability as needed by alternative systems. In addition, our switches connect to the public telephone network via one of several interfaces, including high-density T1 and E1 interfaces. We offer a range of switches of varying capabilities to meet the needs of enterprises of all sizes. The modular nature of our switches allows our enterprise customers to easily expand their system capacity by deploying additional switches across their network.

          ShorePhone IP phones. We offer a range of innovative, high performance phones to meet the needs of the different types of end users across the enterprise. Our phones are designed to provide a superior combination of ergonomics, sound quality and appearance. We offer a variety of phones that vary by size, display features, line capacity and Gigabit Ethernet support. ShorePhone IP phones are designed to function without any configuration, simplifying installation. Remote workers can also utilize ShoreTel IP telephones using an integrated VPN feature and mobile workers can select Wi-Fi phones that work with the open interfaces of the system.

4


          ShoreWare software applications. Our ShoreWare software features a number of applications that facilitate the end user experience and enterprise system management. In addition, we offer additional business applications that integrate with core business processes to provide enhanced end user productivity. An industry standard server is used to support these applications, as opposed to the call management functions of our systems, which run on ShoreGear switches. Our ShoreWare software consists of our proprietary software as well as third-party applications and includes:

 

 

 

 

Personal Call Manager. ShoreWare® Call Manager is an application suite for end users that includes ShoreWare Personal Call Manager, ShoreWare Professional Call Manager, ShoreWare Operator Call Manager and ShoreWare Mobile Call Manager Each application enables users to easily manage communications from their computer, and seamlessly move between video, voice (wired or wireless) or IM. By streamlining business communications, Call Manager improves communication accuracy, boosts productivity, and helps ensure effective collaboration. Call Manager provides easy licensing, easy set up, flexible features, telephony and IM control, integrated advanced call management, quality desktop video and softphone and a highly customizable interface.

 

 

 

 

Office Anywhere. The Office Anywhere feature enables end users outside the office to manage calls with Personal Call Manager and to enjoy the same call handling productivity benefits as their office-based colleagues. Calls directed to the end user’s office phone are forwarded to the end user’s location, and the end user’s outbound calls appear to the called party as if they originated in the end user’s office. Using Office Anywhere, end users have the same call management and unified messaging features and functionality at remote locations as they have in their offices.

 

 

 

 

Unified Messaging. Unified Messaging integrates our voicemail application with Microsoft Outlook. This enables end users to receive, send, be notified of and play voice mail messages through their Microsoft Outlook email.

 

 

 

 

Automated Attendant. Automated Attendant provides end users with a 24-hour automated call answering and routing capability that enables the enterprise to direct callers to appropriate individuals, workgroups or messages.

 

 

 

 

ShoreTel Contact Center. ShoreWare Contact Center applications provide a range of features to satisfy the needs of all organizations, from basic call center capabilities to sophisticated distributed multimedia contact center capabilities. The virtual contact center is now a reality as ShoreWare Contact Center enables organizations to route incoming contacts to the most appropriate agent in a multisite contact center, regardless of location.

 

 

 

 

Converged Conferencing. ShoreTel Converged Conferencing enables enterprises to conduct large audio conferences and provides collaboration tools for application sharing, desktop sharing, instant messaging and end user presence information.

 

 

 

 

Microsoft Integration . For customers seeking to leverage their investment in Microsoft’s Unified Communications portfolio, ShoreTel offers a range of integration options. Users can leverage their Microsoft Exchange messaging platform and Microsoft Office Communications Server installation with the ShoreTel solution as well as control their ShoreTel IP telephony using the Microsoft Office Communicator.

 

 

 

 

ShoreWare system management. Our browser-based system management applications consist of ShoreWare Director and ShoreWare System Monitor.

 

 

 

 

ShoreWare Director. ShoreWare Director provides enterprises with a single point of system management, enabling IT administrators to view and manage the entire system of the enterprise from any location using a single application. A new end user’s extension, mailbox and automated attendant profile can be added from a single management screen, avoiding the additional work required with most PBXs, voice mail systems and automated attendants.

 

 

 

 

Business integration. We offer businesses the option to enhance their communication, enable their business applications pre-built solutions that integration with several customer relationship management (CRM) solutions (Salesforce.com, Microsoft Dynamics, Netsuite and RightNow) as well as cost recovery applications (Equitrak and Copitrak, and Lexis/Nexis Time Matters). These integrations are designed to improve the productivity of end users that use these application by seamlessly integrating communications capabilities into their data-driven workflow. Customers or partners can create additional business integrations using the open interfaces of the system available for developers through ShoreTel’s Developer Network.

5


      ShoreTel Global Services

          We complement our product offerings with a broad range of services that help us maintain and expand our relationships with enterprise customers and channel partners and, in the case of post-contractual support, provide us with recurring revenue. Typically, our channel partners provide many of these services, although we provide back up and escalation support as needed, or if requested by the enterprise customer, we provide these services directly.

          The ShoreTel Global Services include post-contractual support, training, system design and installation, and professional services as follows:

 

 

 

 

Post-contractual support services include web-based access support services and tools, access to technical support engineers, hardware replacement and software updates. These services are typically offered under support contracts with terms of up to five years.

 

 

 

 

Training services include certification programs for channel partners, training programs at enterprise customer or channel partner locations and self-paced, desktop training programs.

 

 

 

 

System design and installation services include the assessment of the unified communications requirements of a particular enterprise, the configuration of a system to maximize its efficiency, the management of the installation, and the subsequent testing and implementation of our systems.

 

 

 

 

Professional services include software development to improve system performance, enable integration of our systems with third party applications or legacy systems, streamline business processes and address enterprise customer-specific business opportunities.

     Technology

          Our systems are based on a combination of our proprietary software, industry-standard interfaces and protocols, and customized and off-the-shelf hardware components. We have developed proprietary technologies that are critical to the operation of the servers and ShoreGear switches within our systems and provide our systems with the properties that distinguish them from alternative IP systems.

          The key elements of our distributed software architecture are:

 

 

 

 

software that allows a geographically-distributed system to operate and be managed as a single system;

 

 

 

 

software that enables calling between switches and allows calls to be distributed among switches instead of using a single centralized switch;

 

 

 

 

software that enables ShoreGear switches to obtain call routing information;

 

 

 

 

software that monitors the bandwidth consumed on each WAN segment and prevents the system from exceeding bandwidth limitations;

 

 

 

 

software that monitors all call activity on ShoreGear switches, and enables integration of ShoreTel and third-party applications;

 

 

 

 

software that coordinates the functions of all servers on the system, allowing them to perform as a single, virtual server;

 

 

 

 

software that enables remote ShoreTel and third-party applications to access and modify our systems;

 

 

 

 

software that enables the switch to communicate with the application server, and receive system configuration information;

 

 

 

 

software that allows each switch to maintain a comprehensive view of the system; and

 

 

 

 

software that provides a graphical user interface for our phones.

          Our switch-based software also uses industry-standard Media Gateway Control Protocol, or MGCP, and Session Initiation Protocol, or SIP, for setting up calls.

          ShoreGear switches are comprised of off-the-shelf, embedded microprocessors and networking components, such as Ethernet controllers, and customized integrated circuits. These switches run on an embedded operating system, and use random access memory and flash memory and our switch call management software for application processing. ShorePhone IP phones are comprised of enterprise IP phone chips manufactured by Broadcom Corporation and customized LCD displays, microphones and speaker circuitry.

     Enterprise Customers

          Our enterprise customers include small, medium and large companies and public institutions in a wide range of vertical markets, including professional services, financial services, government, education, health care, manufacturing, non-profit organizations, and technology industries. As of June 30, 2009, we had sold our IP unified communications systems to approximately 11,000 enterprise customers. Our broad enterprise customer base reflects our historical strength in the small and medium-sized business and public institution sectors.

6


          We believe that maintaining the highest possible levels of customer satisfaction is critical to our ability to retain existing and gain new enterprise customers. We believe that satisfied enterprise customers will purchase more of our products and serve as advocates for our systems, and we work closely with them as they deploy and use our systems. We follow implementation with a formal review with the enterprise customer that involves contacts with our internal staff and third-party technical personnel, and take prompt action to resolve any issues that might have been identified. We also have frequent follow-up contacts with our enterprise customers to promptly resolve issues and to ensure that they are fully satisfied with their system. We also survey enterprise customers that use technical support services to ensure that high-quality support services are being provided. Through this process, we gain valuable insights into the existing and future requirements of our enterprise customers’ activities and this helps us develop product enhancements that address the evolving requirements of enterprises.

          Additionally, to promote high-quality support throughout our services organization, we measure key performance indicators and operational metrics of our services organization, including call answer times, call abandon rates, customer satisfaction with technical support, time to issue resolution, call interaction quality, as well as customer satisfaction with system implementation, training services and technical support, and use the results to direct the management of our services organization.

          We also monitor our enterprise customers’ satisfaction with our channel partners by surveying our enterprise customers after the system is installed. We actively encourage our channel partners to maintain and improve our enterprise customers’ levels of satisfaction. We also monitor our channel partners’ satisfaction with ShoreTel, as their satisfaction with and advocacy of ShoreTel is also very important to our success.

     Sales and Marketing

          We sell our products and services primarily through an extensive network of channel partners, including distributors in most international markets. As of June 30, 2009, we had over 700 channel partners in our network. These channel partners range in size from single-site, regional firms with specialized products and services to multi-national firms that provide a full range of IT products and services including the top three US telecommunication carriers: AT&T, Verizon and Qwest. Our channel partners market and sell our products into both the large enterprise and small-to-medium enterprise markets.

          We maintain a sales organization that recruits, qualifies and trains new channel partners, participates in sales presentations to potential enterprise customers and assesses customer feedback to assist in developing product roadmaps. As part of our increased focus on sales to large accounts, we also have a major accounts program whereby sales personnel assist our channel partners in selling to and providing support for large enterprise customer accounts. No single channel partner accounted for 10% or more of our total revenue in fiscal 2009.

          We believe our channel partner network allows us to effectively sell our systems without the need to build large dedicated in-house sales and service capabilities. We continue to work with existing channel partners to expand their sales of our systems and to recruit new channel partners with a focus on increasing market coverage.

          Our internal marketing team focuses on increasing brand awareness, communicating product advantages and generating qualified leads for our sales force and channel partners. In addition to providing marketing materials, we communicate product and service offerings through our installed-base news letters, direct mail campaigns, web postings, press releases and web-based training.

     Research and Development

          We believe that our ability to enhance our current products, develop and introduce new products on a timely basis, maintain technological competitiveness and meet enterprise customer requirements is essential to our success. To this end, we have assembled a team of engineers with expertise in various fields, including voice and IP communications, unified communications network design, data networking and software engineering. Our principal research and development activities are conducted in Sunnyvale, California. We have invested significant time and financial resources into the development of our architecture, including our switches and related software. We intend to continue to expand our product offerings, improve the features available on our products and integrate our systems with third-party enterprise applications. Research and development expenses were $30.6 million, $26.7 million, and $17.2 million in fiscal 2009, 2008, and 2007, respectively.

     Manufacturing and Suppliers

          We outsource the manufacturing of our hardware products. This outsourcing allows us to:

 

 

 

 

avoid costly capital expenditures for the establishment of manufacturing operations;

 

 

 

 

focus on the design, development, sales and support of our hardware products; and

 

 

 

 

leverage the scale, expertise and purchasing power of specialized contract manufacturers.

          Currently, we have arrangements for the production of our switches with a contract manufacturer in California and for the production of our phones with a contract manufacturer located in China. We are qualifying an additional manufacturer of our phones. Our reliance on contract manufacturers involves a number of potential risks, including the absence of adequate capacity, ownership of certain elements of electronic designs, and reduced control over delivery schedules. Our contract manufacturers provide us with a range of operational and manufacturing services, including component procurement and performing final testing and assembly of our

7


products. We typically depend on our contract manufacturers to procure components and to maintain adequate manufacturing capacity. We typically fulfill product orders out of our Fremont, California location or United Kingdom warehouse.

          We regularly provide forecasts for orders, and we order products from our contract manufacturers based on our projected sales levels, which is well in advance of receiving customer orders. However, enterprise customers may generally cancel or reschedule orders without penalty, and delivery schedules requested by enterprise customers in these orders frequently vary based upon each enterprise customer’s particular needs.

          We also rely on sole or limited numbers of suppliers for several key components utilized in the assembly of our products. For example, our contract manufacturers purchase semiconductors that are essential to the production of our phones from a single source supplier, and we have not identified any alternative suppliers for these components. This reliance is amplified by the fact that our contract manufacturers maintain relatively low inventories and acquire components only as needed. As a result, our ability to respond to enterprise customer orders efficiently may be constrained by the then-current availability or terms and pricing of these components. Constraints on our ability to respond efficiently is partially offset by build-up of levels of safety stock inventory which lets us respond to our enterprise customer orders in a timely manner. We cannot assure you that we will be able to obtain a sufficient quantity of these components in a timely manner to meet the demands of our enterprise customers or that prices of these components will not increase. Any delays or any disruption of the supply of these components could also materially and adversely affect our operating results.

     Financial Information about Geographic Areas

          For financial information about geographic areas, refer to Note 14 of the notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements in Item 8 of this report.

Competition

          The market for enterprise IP unified communications systems is quickly evolving, highly competitive and subject to rapid technological change. As a result of the convergence of voice, video, messaging and data networking technologies that characterize IP enterprise unified communications systems, we compete with providers of enterprise unified communications systems, such as:

 

 

 

• Providers of IP systems, including Cisco Systems

 

 

  • Providers of hybrid IP/TDM communication systems, including Aastra, Avaya, Alcatel-Lucent, Mitel Networks, NEC, Nortel Networks and Siemens

 

 

 

• Providers of Unified Communications software applications providers, including Microsoft

          In addition, because the market for our products is subject to rapid technological change, as the market evolves we may face competition in the future from companies that do not currently compete in the enterprise unified communications market, including companies that currently compete in other sectors of the information technology, communications and software industries or communications companies that serve residential rather than enterprise customers.

          In particular, as more enterprises converge their voice and data networks, the business information technology and communication applications deployed on converged networks become more integrated. We may face increased competition from current leaders in information technology infrastructure, information technology, personal and business applications and the software that connects the network infrastructure to those applications. This could include network systems providers such as Brocade, Hewlett-Packard, and Juniper.

          We could also face competition from new market entrants, whether from new ventures or from established companies moving into the market. Competition from these and other potential market entrants may take many forms, including offering products and applications similar to those we offer as part of a larger, bundled offering. In addition, technological developments and consolidation within the communications industry result in frequent changes to our group of competitors. Many of our current and potential competitors are substantially larger than we are and have significantly greater financial, sales, marketing, and distribution, technical, manufacturing and other resources. We believe that we currently compete favorably with regard to the principal competitive factors applicable to our products, which include:

 

 

 

 

 

 

Product scalability without significant upgrades from 10 to 10,000 users in a single image configuration

 

 

 

 

 

 

Customer satisfaction measured by independent third parties

 

 

 

 

 

 

World class customer service and support from technicians and support centers located around the world

 

 

 

 

 

 

Ease of management for system administrators

 

 

 

 

 

 

Productivity tools for users with integrated unified communications capabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

Lowest total cost of ownership compared to competitor’s IP and hybrid system

8



 

 

 

 

 

 

Highest system availability and reliability with our distributed architecture

 

 

 

 

 

 

Lower selling costs for resellers and distributors with ease of implementation

          For more information concerning competition, please see “Risk Factors — Risks Related To Our Business and Industry — The market in which we operate is intensely competitive, and many of our competitors are larger, more established and better capitalized than we are” and “— As voice, video, messaging and data networks converge, we are likely to face increased competition from Microsoft and other companies in the information technology, personal and business applications and software industries.”

     Intellectual Property

          A factor to our success as a company depends upon our ability to protect our core technology and intellectual property. To accomplish this, we rely on a combination of intellectual property rights, including patents, trade secrets, copyrights and trademarks, as well as customary contractual protections.

          We have eight patents issued in the United States, and have thirty patent applications in the United States. We also have one foreign patent and six patent applications relating to our United States patents.

          The steps we have taken to protect our intellectual property rights may not be adequate. Third parties may infringe or misappropriate our intellectual property rights and may challenge our issued patents. In addition, other parties may independently develop similar or competing technologies designed around any patents that are or may be issued to us. We intend to enforce our intellectual property rights vigorously, and from time to time, we may initiate claims against third parties that we believe are infringing on our intellectual property rights if we are unable to resolve matters satisfactorily through negotiation. If we fail to protect our proprietary rights adequately, our competitors could offer similar products, potentially significantly harming our competitive position and decreasing our revenue.

     Employees

          As of June 30, 2009, we had 375 employees in North America, Europe, Asia and Australia, of which 128 were in sales and marketing, 132 were in engineering, 55 were in global support services, 39 were in general and administrative functions and 21 were in operations. None of our employees are represented by labor unions, and we consider current employee relations to be good.

     Executive Officers

          The following table sets forth information about our executive officers as of September 2, 2009:

 

 

 

 

 

Name

 

Age

 

Position


 


 


John W. Combs

 

62   

 

Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer

Edwin J. Basart

 

60   

 

Founder, Chief Technology Officer and Director

Michael E. Healy

 

48   

 

Chief Financial Officer

Donald J. Girskis

 

49   

 

Senior Vice President, Worldwide Sales

Pedro E. Rump

 

53   

 

Vice President, Engineering and Operations

Walter Weisner

 

53   

 

Vice President, Global Services

Ava M. Hahn

 

36   

 

Vice President, General Counsel and Secretary

          John W. Combs has served as our President and Chief Executive Officer and as a director since July 2004 and as our Chairman since February 2007. From July 2002 to May 2004, Mr. Combs served as Chairman and Chief Executive Officer of Littlefeet Inc., a wireless infrastructure supplier. From September 1999 to July 2002, Mr. Combs served as Chief Executive Officer of InternetConnect Inc., a broadband networking solutions provider. Mr. Combs has also held senior management positions at Nextel Communications, Inc., a wireless digital communications system provider, L.A. Cellular, a wireless network operator, Mitel Inc., a manufacturer of private branch exchanges and Fujitsu Business Communication Systems, Inc., a provider of telecommunications products. Mr. Combs holds a B.S. in engineering from California Polytechnic State University, San Luis Obispo.

           Edwin J. Basart co-founded ShoreTel in 1996 and has served as our Chief Technology Officer and as a director since inception. Prior to co-founding ShoreTel, Mr. Basart co-founded Network Computing Devices, Inc., a provider of thin client computing hardware and software, where he served as Vice President of Engineering, and Ridge Computers, Inc. where he served as Vice President of Software. Mr. Basart began his career as a software engineer at Hewlett Packard. Mr. Basart holds a B.S. in English from Iowa State University and an M.S. in electrical engineering from Stanford University.

           Michael E. Healy has served as our Chief Financial Officer since May 2007. From February 2004 to May 2007, he served as Chief Financial Officer and Senior Vice President of Finance of Genesis Microchip Inc., a supplier of display image processors. From November 2002 to February 2004, Mr. Healy served as Chief Financial Officer of Jamcracker, Inc., a software and application service provider. From September 1997 to June 2002, Mr. Healy held senior level finance positions at Exodus Communications, Inc., an Internet infrastructure outsourcing services provider (Exodus Communications sold substantially all of its assets in January 2002 and changed its name to EXDS, Inc. in February 2002), including as Senior Vice President of Finance prior to February 2002, and as its

9


Chief Financial Officer and Corporate Treasurer from February 2002 to June 2002. From 1987 to 1997, Mr. Healy held various financial management positions at Apple Computer, Inc., and was an auditor at Deloitte & Touche LLP from 1983 to 1987. Mr. Healy holds a B.S. in accounting from Santa Clara University and is a Certified Public Accountant. Mr. Healy is a member of the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants and the California Society of Certified Public Accountants.

          Donald J. Girskis has served as our Senior Vice President of Worldwide Sales since February 2008. From 1993 to 2008, Mr. Girksis held a variety of executive positions at Sprint-Nextel, a telecommunications company, most recently as the Senior Vice President and General Manager of Boost Mobile, a subsidiary of Sprint-Nextel. At Nextel, Mr. Girskis held the position of Area Vice President of Sales, Area Vice President of Marketing, Vice President of Engineering, and General Manager. Prior to Sprint-Nextel, Mr. Girskis held sales management positions with Businessland, and Los Angeles Cellular Telephone Company. Mr. Girskis holds a B.A. in business administration from California State University at Fullerton.

          Pedro E. Rump has served as our Vice President of Engineering and Operations since January 2006. From July 2004 to January 2006, Mr. Rump served as Vice President of Engineering and Operations at Dust Networks, Inc., a developer of embedded wireless sensor networking products. From January 2004 to July 2004, Mr. Rump served as Vice President of Engineering at Sonim Technologies, Inc., a provider of voice over IP applications. From January 2003 to January 2004, Mr. Rump served as Vice President of Engineering at Littlefeet Inc. From January 2002 to October 2002, Mr. Rump served as Vice President of Inviso, a developer of signal transport and display solutions for television and telecommunications. Mr. Rump holds a B.S. and M.S. in electrical engineering from the Swiss Federal Institute of Technology.

          Walter Weisner has served as our Vice President of Global Services since July 2005. From April 2002 to June 2005, Mr. Weisner served as Vice President, Global Support Services for Webex Communications, Inc., a web communications services provider. From October 1999 to March 2002, Mr. Weisner served as Executive Vice President of Operations and Support for InternetConnect. Prior to joining InternetConnect, Mr. Weisner served as Senior Director of Customer Operations and Support for Nextel Communications, Southwest region, and also held positions in product management and product development with Nextel. Mr. Weisner holds a B.A. in business administration from Cleveland State University.

          Ava M. Hahn has served as our Vice President, General Counsel and Secretary since May 2009. Ms. Hahn joined ShoreTel in June 2007 serving in the position of General Counsel and Secretary. From August 2002 to May 2007, Ms. Hahn served in various capacities including General Counsel, Assistant General Counsel and Secretary for Genesis Microchip, Inc., a supplier of display image processors. From August 2000 to August 2002, Ms. Hahn served as Director, Legal Affairs for LuxN, Inc., a provider of optical access equipment. Prior to then, Ms. Hahn was in private practice at Wilson Sonsini Goodrich & Rosati, P.C. Ms. Hahn holds a J.D. from Columbia Law School and a B.A. from the University of California, Berkeley.

 

 

I TEM 1A.

RISK FACTORS

Risks Related to Our Business and Industry

          We may not be able to return to profitability.

          We were not profitable in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2009 and some prior periods, and we had an accumulated deficit of $94.0 million as of June 30, 2009. If we are not able to grow our revenues or maintain our operating expenses at appropriate levels based on those revenues, we may not succeed in achieving or maintaining profitability in future periods. We also incur significant operating expenses and have recently announced that we plan to increase operating expenses in order to fund our growth. If our gross profit does not increase to offset these expected increases in operating expenses, our operating results will be negatively affected. You should not consider our historic annual revenue growth rates as indicative of our future growth particularly in light of the current economic environment. Accordingly we cannot assure you that we will be able to return to significant revenue growth or profitability in the future.

          Current uncertainty in global economic conditions makes it particularly difficult to predict demand for our products, and makes it more likely that our actual results could differ materially from expectations.

          Our operations and performance depend on worldwide economic conditions, which have been depressed in the United States and other countries, and may remain depressed for the foreseeable future. These conditions make it difficult for our customers and potential customers to accurately forecast and plan future business activities, and have caused our customers and potential customers to slow or reduce spending on capital equipment such as our products. These economic conditions could also cause our competitors to drastically reduce prices or take unusual actions to gain a competitive edge, which could force us to provide similar discounts and thereby reduce our profitability. We cannot predict the timing, strength or duration of any economic slowdown or subsequent economic recovery, worldwide, in the United States, or in our industry. These and other economic factors could have a material adverse effect on demand for our products and services, and on our financial condition including profitability and operating results.

          Our business could be harmed by adverse economic conditions in our target markets, reduced spending on information technology and telecommunication products by customers and potential customers, and the tightening of the credit markets.

10


          Our business depends on the overall demand for information technology, and in particular for telecommunications systems. The market we serve is emerging and the purchase of our products involves significant upfront expenditures. In addition, the purchase of our products can be discretionary and may involve a significant commitment of capital and other resources. In many cases, our resellers and/or end customers procure our products and services on credit. If credit is not available to them, it may be difficult or impossible for our resellers and/or end customers to purchase our products. Weak economic conditions in our target markets, or a reduction in information technology or telecommunications spending even if economic conditions improve, would likely adversely impact our business, operating results and financial condition in a number of ways, including longer sales cycles, lower prices for our products and reduced unit sales.

          We rely on third-party resellers to sell our products, and disruptions to, or our failure to develop and manage our distribution channels and the processes and procedures that support them could adversely affect our business.

          Substantially all of our total revenue is generated through indirect channel sales. These indirect sales channels consist of third-party resellers that market and sell telecommunications systems and other products and services to customers. We expect indirect channel sales will continue to generate a substantial majority of our total revenue in the future. Therefore, our success is highly dependent upon establishing and maintaining successful relationships with third-party resellers, and the financial health of these resellers.

          Our success in expanding our customer base to larger enterprises will depend in part on our ability to expand our channel to partners that serve those larger enterprises. In addition, we rely on these entities to provide many of the installation, implementation and support services for our products. Accordingly, our success depends in large part on the effective performance of these channel partners. If a partner’s performance is ineffective, it may reflect badly upon ShoreTel or negatively impact our business. For example, if one of these resellers experiences a work stoppage due to a labor union dispute, installation of our phone systems could be delayed and our sales and reputation could suffer. By relying on channel partners, we may in some cases have little or no contact with the ultimate users of our products, thereby making it more difficult for us to establish brand awareness, ensure proper delivery and installation of our products, service ongoing enterprise customer requirements and respond to evolving enterprise customer needs. This difficulty could be more pronounced in international markets, where we expect that enterprise customers will purchase our systems from a channel partner that purchased through a distributor. Additionally, some of our channel partners are smaller companies that may not have the same financial resources as other of our larger channel partners, which exposes us to collections risks.

          As a result of the ongoing credit contraction in the credit markets, our channel partners may have their credit lines withdrawn or may not be able to procure financing necessary to purchase our products, or maintain their business. Additionally, as a result of the current economic downturn, the businesses of our channel partners are being adversely affected. Our channel partners could be unable to devote the same level of resources to selling and marketing our systems, or worse, they could discontinue operations. In such event, we must find another channel partner to support the failed partner’s customers, or take on support of those customers ourselves, even if we have not been paid to do so. If our resellers cannot continue to purchase our products, or if they cease operations, our ability to collect receivables, our operating results and our financial condition will be materially adversely affected.

          Recruiting and retaining qualified channel partners and training them in our technology and products requires significant time and resources. In order to develop and expand our distribution channel, we must continue to scale and improve our processes and procedures that support our channel, including investment in systems and training, and those processes and procedures may become increasingly complex and difficult to manage. We have no long-term contracts or minimum purchase commitments with any of our channel partners, and our contracts with these channel partners do not prohibit them from offering products or services that compete with ours. Our competitors may be effective in providing incentives to existing and potential channel partners to favor their products or to prevent or reduce sales of our products. Our channel partners may choose not to offer our products exclusively or at all. Our failure to establish and maintain successful relationships with channel partners would likely materially adversely affect our business, operating results and financial condition.

          Our business may be harmed if our contract manufacturers are not able to provide us with adequate supplies.

          We outsource the manufacturing of our products. Currently, we have arrangements for the production of our products with a contract manufacturer in California and a contract manufacturer located in China, and are in the process of qualifying another manufacturer in China. Our reliance on contract manufacturers involves a number of potential risks, including the absence of adequate capacity, financial viability, ownership of certain elements of electronic designs, the ongoing viability of those contract manufacturers, and reduced control over delivery schedules.

          We depend on our contract manufacturers to finance the production of goods ordered and to maintain adequate manufacturing capacity. Global economic conditions could adversely impact the financial condition of our contract manufacturers and their suppliers that could impact our contract manufacturer’s ability to procure components or otherwise manufacture our products. Additionally, as a result of the current economic downturn, the businesses of our contract manufacturers and other suppliers could be adversely affected and they may be required to slow or curtail operations. We do not exert direct control over our contract manufacturers or suppliers of our contract manufacturers, so we may be unable to procure timely delivery of acceptable products to our enterprise customers or incur substantially higher product costs if we move production to other contract manufacturers.

11


          If sales of our products continue to grow, one or both of our contract manufacturers may not have sufficient capacity to enable it to increase production to meet the demand for our products. Moreover, both of our contract manufacturers could have manufacturing engagements with companies that are much larger than we are and whose production needs are much greater than ours. As a result, one or both of our contract manufacturers may choose to devote additional resources to the production of products other than ours if capacity is limited.

          In addition, our contract manufacturers do not have any written contractual obligation to accept any purchase order that we submit for the manufacture of any of our products nor do we have any assurance that our contract manufacturers will agree to manufacture and supply any or all of our requirements for our products. Furthermore, either of our contract manufacturers may unilaterally terminate their relationship with us at any time upon 180 days notice with respect to the contract manufacturer of our switches and 120 days notice with respect to the contract manufacturer of our phones or seek to increase the prices they charge us. As a result, we are not assured that our current manufacturers will continue to provide us with an uninterrupted supply of products of at an acceptable price in the future.

          Even if our contract manufacturers accept and fulfill our orders, it is possible that the products may not meet our specifications. Because we do not control the final assembly and quality assurance of our products, there is a possibility that these products may contain defects or otherwise not meet our quality standards, which could result in warranty claims against us that could adversely affect our operating results and future sales.

          If our contract manufacturers are unable or unwilling to continue manufacturing our products in required volumes and to meet our quality specifications, or if they significantly increase their prices, whether caused by uncertain global economic conditions, tightening of the credit markets, their weak financial condition or otherwise, we will have to procure components on their behalf in the short term and identify one or more acceptable alternative contract manufacturers. The process of identifying and qualifying a new contract manufacturer can be time consuming, and we may not be able to substitute suitable alternative contract manufacturers in a timely manner or at acceptable prices. Additionally, transitioning to new contract manufacturers may cause delays in supply if the new contract manufacturers have difficulty manufacturing products to our specifications or quality standards and may result in unexpected costs to our business. Furthermore, we do not own the electronic design for our IP phones, hence it may be more difficult or costly for us to change the contract manufacturer of our phones or to arrange for an alternate of or a replacement for these products in a timely manner should a transition be required. This could also subject us to the risk that our competitors could obtain phones containing technology that is the same as or similar to the technology in our phones.

          Any disruption in the supply of products from our contract manufacturers may harm our business and could result in a loss of sales and an increase in production costs resulting in lower gross product margins, which could adversely affect our business and results of operations.

          Our operating results may fluctuate in the future, which could cause our stock price to decline.

          Our historical revenues and operating results have varied from quarter to quarter. Moreover, our actual or projected operating results for some quarters may not meet the expectations of stock market analysts and investors, which may cause our stock price to decline. In addition to the factors discussed elsewhere in this “Risk Factors” section, a number of factors may cause our revenue to fall short of our expectations or cause fluctuations in our operating results, including:

 

 

 

 

the purchasing and budgeting cycles of enterprise customers;

 

 

 

 

the timing and volume of shipments of our products during a quarter, particularly as we have recently begun to experience an increased level of sales occurring towards the end of a quarter;

 

 

 

 

delays in purchasing decisions by our customers from one quarter to the next, or later;

 

 

 

 

adverse conditions specific to the IP telecommunications market, including decreased demand due to overall economic conditions or reduced discretionary spending by enterprises, rates of adoption of IP telecommunications systems and introduction of new standards;

 

 

 

 

the amount and timing of operating costs related to the maintenance and expansion of our business, operations and infrastructure;

 

 

 

 

the timing of recognition of revenue from sales to our customers;

 

 

 

 

the timing and success of new product introductions by us or our competitors;

 

 

 

 

changes in our or our competitors’ pricing policies or sales terms;

 

 

 

 

changes in the mix of our products and services sold during a particular period;

 

 

 

 

our ability to control costs, including third-party manufacturing costs and costs of components;

 

 

 

 

our ability to obtain sufficient supplies of components;

12



 

 

 

 

our ability to maintain sufficient production volumes for our products from our contract manufacturers;

 

 

 

 

volatility in our stock price, which may lead to higher stock compensation expenses pursuant to Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 123(R), Share-Based Payment;

 

 

 

 

volatility and fluctuation in foreign currency exchange rates;

 

 

 

 

the timing of costs related to the development or acquisition of technologies or businesses;

 

 

 

 

changes in domestic and international regulatory environments affecting the internet and telecommunications industries;

 

 

 

 

our ability to successfully expand our international operations;

 

 

 

 

seasonality in our target markets;

 

 

 

 

general economic conditions or economic recession;

 

 

 

 

decline in interest rates on our investments; and

 

 

 

 

publicly-announced litigation, and the impact of such litigation on our operating results.

          Because our operating expenses are largely fixed in the short-term, any shortfalls in revenue in a given period would have a direct and adverse effect on our operating results in that period. We believe that our quarterly and annual revenue and results of operations may vary significantly in the future and that period-to-period comparisons of our operating results may not be meaningful. You should not rely on the results of one period as an indication of future performance.

          The gross margins on our products may decrease due to competitive pressures or otherwise, which could negatively impact our profitability.

          It is possible that the gross margins on our products will decrease in the future in response to competitive pricing pressures, new product introductions by us or our competitors, changes in the costs of components, manufacturing issues, royalties we need to pay to use certain intellectual property, or other factors. If we experience decreased gross margins and we are unable to respond in a timely manner by introducing and selling new, higher-margin products successfully and continually reducing our product costs, our gross margins may decline, which will harm our business and results of operations.

 

 

 

The market in which we operate is intensely competitive, and many of our competitors are larger, more established and better capitalized than we are.

          The market for IP telecommunications and other telecommunications systems is extremely competitive. Our competitors include companies that offer IP systems, such as Cisco Systems, Inc. and that offer hybrid systems, such as Alcatel-Lucent, Avaya, Mitel Networks Corporation and Nortel Networks Corporation. In addition, we compete with much larger companies such as Microsoft in the unified communications market. Several of the companies that offer hybrid systems are beginning to also offer IP telecommunications systems. Many of our competitors are substantially larger and have greater financial, technical, research and development, sales and marketing, manufacturing, distribution and other resources. We could also face competition from new market entrants, whether from new ventures or from established companies moving in to the market. These competitors have various other advantages over us, including:

 

 

 

 

greater market presence, name recognition and brand reputation;

 

 

 

 

larger distribution channels;

 

 

 

 

a larger installed base of telecommunications and networking systems with enterprise customers;

 

 

 

 

larger and more geographically distributed services and support organizations and capabilities;

 

 

 

 

a broader offering of telecommunications and networking products, applications and services;

 

 

 

 

a more established international presence to address the needs of global enterprises;

 

 

 

 

larger patent and intellectual property portfolios;

 

 

 

 

longer operating histories;

 

 

 

 

a longer history of implementing large-scale telecommunications or networking systems;

 

 

 

 

more established relationships with industry participants, customers, suppliers, distributors and other technology companies; and

 

 

 

 

the ability to acquire technologies or consolidate with other companies in the industry to compete more effectively.

          Given their capital resources, many of these competitors are in a better position to withstand any significant reduction in capital spending by enterprise customers on telecommunications equipment and are not as susceptible to downturns in a particular market. This risk is enhanced because we focus our business solely on the enterprise IP telecommunications market and do not have a diversified portfolio of products that are applicable to other market segments.

13


          We compete primarily on the basis of price, feature set, reliability, scalability, usability, total cost of ownership and service. Because our competitors have greater financial strength than we do and are able to offer a more diversified bundle of products and services, they have offered and in the future may offer telecommunications products at lower prices than we do. These larger competitors can also bundle products with other services, such as hosted or managed services, effectively reducing the price of their products. In order to remain competitive from a cost perspective, we have in the past reduced the prices of our products, and we may be required to do so in the future, in order to gain enterprise customers. Price reductions could have a negative effect on our gross margins.

          Our competitors may also be able to devote more resources to developing new or enhanced products, including products that may be based on new technologies or standards. If our competitors’ products become more accepted than our products, our competitive position will be impaired and we may not be able to increase our revenue or may experience decreased gross margins. If any of our competitors’ products or technologies become the industry standard, if they are successful in bringing their products to market earlier, or if their products are more technologically capable than ours, then our sales could be materially adversely affected. We may not be able to maintain or improve our competitive position against our current or future competitors, and our failure to do so could materially and adversely affect our business.

 

 

 

As voice and data networks converge, we are likely to face increased competition from Microsoft and other companies in the information technology, personal and business applications and software industries.

          The convergence of voice and data networks and their wider deployment by enterprises has led information technology and communication applications deployed on converged networks to become more integrated. This integration has created an opportunity for the leaders in information technology, personal and business applications and the software that connects the network infrastructure to those applications, to enter the telecommunications market and offer products that compete with our systems, commonly referred to as Unified Communications. Competition from these potential market entrants may take many forms, and they may offer products and applications similar to those we offer. For example, Microsoft Corporation has announced its unified communications product roadmap. This includes “Office Communicator 2007,” which Microsoft states allows end users to control communications, including voice over IP, through the Office Communicator application on their PC, which provides functionality that competes with our Personal Call Manager application. Microsoft has also introduced “Office Communications Server 2007,” a product that offers competing unified messaging capabilities. Microsoft has also developed an IP phone and has licensed the rights to produce such phones to third parties. Microsoft and other leaders in the information technology, personal and business applications and software industries, have substantial financial and other resources that they could devote to this market.

          If Microsoft continues to move into the telecommunications market or if other new competitors from the information technology, personal and business applications or software industries enter the telecommunications market, the market for IP telecommunications systems will become increasingly competitive. If the solutions offered by Microsoft or other new competitors achieve substantial market penetration, or if we cannot integrate our products with Microsoft’s, we may not be able to maintain or improve our market position, and our failure to do so could materially and adversely affect our business and results of operations.

 

 

 

If the emerging market for enterprise IP telecommunications systems does not continue to grow and if we do not increase our market share, our future business would be harmed.

          The market for enterprise IP telecommunications systems is evolving rapidly and is characterized by an increasing number of market entrants. As is typical of a new and rapidly evolving industry, the demand for and market acceptance of, enterprise IP telecommunications systems products and services are uncertain. We cannot assure you that enterprise telecommunications systems that operate on IP networks will become widespread. In particular, enterprises that have already invested substantial resources in other means of communicating information may be reluctant or slow to implement an IP telecommunications system that can require significant initial capital expenditures as compared to a hybrid system that might require a lower initial capital expenditure despite higher potential total expenditures over the long term. If the market for enterprise IP telecommunications systems fails to develop or develops more slowly than we anticipate, our products could fail to achieve market acceptance, which in turn could significantly harm our business. This growth may be inhibited by a number of factors, such as:

 

 

 

 

initial costs of implementation for a new system;

 

 

 

 

quality of infrastructure;

 

 

 

 

security concerns;

 

 

 

 

equipment, software or other technology failures;

 

 

 

 

regulatory encroachments;

 

 

 

 

inconsistent quality of service;

 

 

 

 

perceived unreliability or poor voice quality over IP networks as compared to circuit-switched networks; and

 

 

 

 

lack of availability of cost-effective, high-speed network capacity.

14


          Moreover, as IP-based data communications and telecommunications usage grow, the infrastructure used to support these services, whether public or private, may not be able to support the demands placed on them and their performance or reliability may decline.

          Even if enterprise IP telecommunications systems become more widespread in the future, we cannot assure you that our products will attain broad market acceptance. We estimate that our sales represent a very small percentage of the total available market for enterprise IP telecommunications systems. We must increase our market penetration in order to maintain and expand our business.

 

 

 

If we fail to manage our growth effectively, our business could be harmed.

          We recently announced that we plan to further expand our operations, particularly in sales headcount, channel partnerships, and the number and size of enterprise customers implementing our systems. We will need to increase our operating expenses in order to fund this expansion. This growth will place a significant strain on our management, administrative, operational and financial infrastructure. Our success will depend upon our ability to manage this growth effectively. If we do not increase our revenues commensurate to our increased spending, we will not be profitable. To manage the expected growth of our operations and personnel, we will need to continue to improve our operational, financial and management controls and our reporting systems and procedures. Failure to effectively manage growth could result in difficulty in filling enterprise customer orders, declines in product quality or customer satisfaction, increases in costs, production and distribution difficulties, and any of these difficulties could adversely impact our business performance and results of operations.

 

 

 

Our sales cycle can be lengthy and unpredictable, which makes it difficult to forecast the amount of our sales and operating expenses in any particular period.

          The sales cycle for our products typically ranges from six to twelve months, or longer. Part of our strategy is to increasingly target our sales efforts on larger enterprises. Because the sales cycle for large enterprises is generally longer than for smaller enterprises, our sales cycle in the future may be even longer than it has been historically. As a result, we may have limited ability to forecast whether or in which period a sale will occur. The success of our product sales process is subject to many factors, some of which we have little or no control over, including:

 

 

 

 

the timing of enterprise customers’ budget cycles and approval processes;

 

 

 

 

a technical evaluation or trial by potential enterprise customers;

 

 

 

 

our ability to introduce new products, features or functionality in a manner that suits the needs of a particular enterprise customer;

 

 

 

 

the announcement or introduction of competing products; and

 

 

 

 

the strength of existing relationships between our competitors and potential enterprise customers.

          We may expend substantial time, effort and money educating our current and prospective enterprise customers as to the value of, and benefits delivered by, our products, and ultimately fail to produce a sale. If we are unsuccessful in closing sales after expending significant resources, our operating results will be adversely affected. Furthermore, if sales forecasted for a particular period do not occur in such period, our operating results for that period could be substantially lower than anticipated and the market price of our common stock could decline.

 

 

 

If we fail to develop and introduce new products and features in a timely manner, or if we fail to manage product transitions, we could experience decreased revenue or decreased selling prices in the future.

          Our future growth depends on our ability to develop and introduce new products successfully. Due to the complexity of the type of products we produce, there are significant technical risks that may affect our ability to introduce new products and features successfully. For example, our future success will depend in part on our ability to introduce new applications such as contact center systems, which are based on complex software, and our ability to integrate our products with other business applications, such as Microsoft Office. In addition, we must commit significant resources to developing new products and features before knowing whether our investments will result in products that are accepted by the market. The success of new products depends on many factors, including:

 

 

 

 

the ability of our products to compete with the products and solutions offered by our competitors;

 

 

 

 

the cost of our products;

 

 

 

 

the reliability of our products;

 

 

 

 

the timeliness of the introduction and delivery of our products; and

 

 

 

 

the market acceptance of our products.

15


          If we are unable to develop and introduce new products in a timely manner or in response to changing market conditions or enterprise customer requirements, or if these products do not achieve market acceptance, our operating results could be materially and adversely affected.

          Product introductions by us in future periods may also reduce demand for, or cause price declines with respect to, our existing products. As new or enhanced products are introduced, we must successfully manage the transition from older products, avoid excessive levels of older product inventories and ensure that sufficient supplies of new products can be delivered to meet enterprise customer demand. Our failure to do so could adversely affect our revenue, gross margins and other operating results.

 

 

 

Our products incorporate some sole sourced components and the inability of these sole source suppliers to provide adequate supplies of these components may prevent us from selling our products for a significant period of time or limit our ability to deliver sufficient amounts of our products.

          We rely on sole or limited numbers of suppliers for several key components utilized in the assembly of our products. For example, we source semiconductors that are essential to the operation of our phones from separate single suppliers, and we have not identified or qualified any alternative suppliers for these components. We do not have supply agreements with our sole source suppliers, and the components for our products are typically procured by our contract manufacturers. If we lose access to these components we may not be able to sell our products for a significant period of time, and we could incur significant costs to redesign our products or to qualify alternative suppliers. This reliance on a sole source or limited number of suppliers involves several additional risks, including:

 

 

 

 

supplier capacity constraints;

 

 

 

 

price increases;

 

 

 

 

purchasing lead times;

 

 

 

 

timely delivery; and

 

 

 

 

component quality.

          This reliance is exacerbated by the fact that we maintain a relatively small amount of inventory and our contract manufacturers typically acquire components only as needed. As a result, our ability to respond to enterprise customer orders efficiently may be constrained by the then-current availability or the terms and pricing of these components. Disruption or termination of the supply of these components could delay shipments of our products and could materially and adversely affect our relationships with current and prospective enterprise customers. Also, from time to time we have experienced component quality issues with products obtained from our contract manufacturers. In addition, any increase in the price of these components could reduce our gross margin and adversely impact our profitability. We may not be able to obtain a sufficient quantity of these components to meet the demands of enterprise customers in a timely manner or that prices of these components may increase. In addition, problems with respect to yield and quality of these components and timeliness of deliveries could occur. These delays could also materially and adversely affect our operating results.

 

 

 

If we fail to offer high quality customer support and services, our business would suffer.

          Once our telephone systems are deployed within our end customers’ sites, our customers depend on our support organization to resolve any issues relating to our products. A high level of customer support and services is important for the successful marketing and sale of our products. If we or our channel partners do not help our customers quickly resolve post-deployment issues and provide effective ongoing support, our ability to sell our products to existing customers would suffer and our reputation with potential customers would be harmed. Many of our channel partners offer primary support for the products they sell to customers. If the channel partners fail to provide timely and effective services, our business could be harmed. As we expand our sales, we will be required to hire and train additional support personnel. In addition, as we expand our operations internationally, our support organization will face additional challenges including those associated with delivering support, training and documentation in languages other than English. If we fail to maintain high quality customer support or to grow our support organization to match any future sales growth, our business will suffer.

 

 

 

If we fail to forecast demand for our products accurately, we may have excess or insufficient inventory, which may increase our operating costs, decrease our revenues and harm our business.

          We generate forecasts of future demand for our products several months prior to the scheduled delivery to our prospective customers and typically prior to receiving a purchase order from our customers. We therefore make significant investments before our resellers or customers are contractually obligated to purchase our products and before we know if corresponding shipment forecasts will be changed. Our resellers and customers are not contractually bound by the forecasts they provide us until they sign a purchase order, and the orders we ultimately receive often differ from original forecasts. If we underestimate demand for our products, we will have inadequate inventory, which could result in delays in shipments, loss of orders and reduced revenues. This is exacerbated by the fact that lead times for materials and components that we need can vary significantly and depend on factors such as the specific supplier, contract terms and demand for each component at a given time. On the other hand, if we overestimate demand for our

16


products and increase our inventory in anticipation of customer orders that do not materialize, we will have excess inventory and we will face a risk of significant inventory write-downs. Our failure to forecast demand accurately on a timely basis could result in a decrease in our revenues and gross margins.

 

 

 

Our products are highly complex and may contain undetected software or hardware errors, which could harm our reputation and future product sales.

          Because our enterprise customers rely on our products for telecommunications, an application that is critical to their business, any failure to provide high quality and reliable products, whether caused by our own failure or failures by our contract manufacturer or suppliers, could damage our reputation and reduce demand for our products. Our products have in the past contained, and may in the future contain, undetected errors or defects. Some errors in our products may only be discovered after a product has been installed and used by enterprise customers. Any errors or defects discovered in our products after commercial release could result in loss of revenue, loss of enterprise customers and increased service and warranty costs, any of which could adversely affect our business. In addition, we could face claims for product liability, tort or breach of warranty. Our purchase orders contain provisions relating to warranty disclaimers and liability limitations, which may not be upheld. Defending a lawsuit, regardless of its merit, is costly and may divert management’s attention and adversely affect the market’s perception of us and our products. In addition, if our business liability insurance coverage proves inadequate or future coverage is unavailable on acceptable terms or at all, our business, operating results and financial condition could be adversely affected.

 

 

 

If we fail to respond to technological changes and evolving industry standards, our products could become obsolete or less competitive in the future.

          The telecommunications industry is highly competitive and characterized by rapidly changing technologies and standards, frequent product introductions and short product life cycles. Accordingly, our operating results depend upon, among other things, our ability to develop and introduce new products and our ability to reduce production costs of existing products. The process of developing new technologies and products is complex, and if we are unable to develop enhancements to, and new features for, our existing products or acceptable new products that keep pace with technological developments or industry standards, our products may become obsolete, less marketable and less competitive and our business will be harmed.

          In addition, as industry standards evolve, it is possible that one standard becomes predominant in the market. This could facilitate the entry into the market of competing products, which could result in significant pricing pressure. Additionally, if one standard becomes predominant and we adopt that standard, enterprises may be able to create a unified, integrated system by using phones, switches, servers, applications, or other telecommunications products produced by different companies. Therefore, we may be unable to sell complete systems to enterprise customers because the enterprise customers elect to purchase portions of their telecommunications systems from our competitors. For example, if a single industry standard is adopted, customers may elect to purchase our switches, but could purchase software applications and phones from other vendors. This could reduce our revenue and gross margins if enterprise customers instead purchase primarily lower-margin products from us. Conversely, if one standard becomes predominant, and we do not adopt it, potential enterprise customers may choose to buy a competing system that is based on that standard.

 

 

 

Our future success depends on our ability to attract, integrate and retain key personnel, and our failure to do so could harm our ability to grow our business.

          Our future success will depend, to a significant extent, on our ability to attract, integrate and retain our key personnel, namely our management team and experienced sales and engineering personnel. We may experience difficulty assimilating our newly hired personnel, which may adversely affect our business. In addition, we must retain and motivate high quality personnel, and we must also attract and assimilate other highly qualified employees. Competition for qualified management, technical and other personnel can be intense, and we may not be successful in attracting and retaining such personnel. Competitors have in the past and may in the future attempt to recruit our employees, and our management and key employees are not bound by agreements that could prevent them from terminating their employment at any time. If we fail to attract, integrate and retain key employees, our ability to manage and grow our business could be harmed.

 

 

 

We intend to expand our international operations, which could expose us to significant risks.

          To date we have limited international operations and have had low amounts of revenue from international enterprise customers. The future success of our business will depend, in part, on our ability to expand our operations and enterprise customer base successfully worldwide. Operating in international markets requires significant resources and management attention and will subject us to regulatory, economic and political risks that are different from those in the United States. Because of our limited experience with international operations, our international expansion efforts may not be successful. In addition, we will face risks in doing business internationally that could adversely affect our business, including:

 

 

 

 

our ability to comply with differing technical and environmental standards and certification requirements outside the United States;

 

 

 

 

difficulties and costs associated with staffing and managing foreign operations;

17



 

 

 

 

greater difficulty collecting accounts receivable and longer payment cycles;

 

 

 

 

the need to adapt our products for specific countries;

 

 

 

 

availability of reliable broadband connectivity and wide area networks in targeted areas for expansion;

 

 

 

 

unexpected changes in regulatory requirements;

 

 

 

 

difficulties in understanding and complying with local laws, regulations and customs in foreign jurisdictions;

 

 

 

 

tariffs, export controls and other non-tariff barriers such as quotas and local content rules;

 

 

 

 

more limited protection for intellectual property rights in some countries;

 

 

 

 

adverse tax consequences;

 

 

 

 

fluctuations in currency exchange rates, which could increase the price of our products outside of the United States, increase the expenses of our international operations and expose us to foreign currency exchange rate risk;

 

 

 

 

restrictions on the transfer of funds; and

 

 

 

 

new and different sources of competition.

          Our failure to manage any of these risks successfully could harm our future international operations and our overall business.

 

 

 

We are subject to environmental and other health and safety regulations that may increase our costs of operations or limit our activities.

          We are subject to environmental and other health and safety regulations relating to matters such as reductions in the use of harmful substances, the use of lead-free soldering and the recycling of products and packaging materials. For example, the European Parliament and the Counsel of the European Union have published directives on waste electrical and electronic equipment and on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. These directives generally require electronics producers to bear the cost of collection, treatment, recovery and safe disposal of past and future products from end users and to ensure that new electrical and electronic equipment does not contain specified hazardous substances. While the cost of these directives to us cannot be determined before regulations are adopted in individual member states of the European Union, it may be substantial and may divert resources, which could detract from our ability to develop new products or operate our business, particularly if we increase international operations. We may not be able to comply in all cases with applicable environmental and other regulations, and if we do not, we may incur remediation costs or we may not be able to offer our products for sale in certain countries, which could adversely affect our results.

 

 

 

Some of our competitors could design their products to prevent or impair the interoperability of our products with enterprise customers’ networks, which could cause installations to be delayed or cancelled.

          Our products must interface with enterprise customer software, equipment and systems in their networks, each of which may have different specifications. To the extent our competitors supply network software, equipment or systems to our enterprise customers, it is possible these competitors could design their technologies to be closed or proprietary systems that are incompatible with our products or to work less effectively with our products than their own. As a result, enterprise customers would be incentivized to purchase products that are compatible with the products and technologies of our competitors over our products. A lack of interoperability may result in significant redesign costs and harm relations with our enterprise customers. If our products do not interoperate with our enterprise customers’ networks, installations could be delayed or orders for our products could be cancelled, which would result in losses of revenue and enterprise customers that could significantly harm our business.

 

 

 

Our products require reliable broadband connections, and we may be unable to sell our products in markets where broadband connections are not yet widely available.

          End users of our products must have reliable access to an enterprise customer’s wide area network in order for our products to perform properly. Accordingly, it is not likely that there will be demand for our products in geographic areas that do not have a sufficiently reliable infrastructure of broadband connections. Many geographic locations do not have reliable infrastructure for broadband connections, particularly in some international markets. Our future growth could be limited if broadband connections are not or do not become widely available in markets that we target.

 

 

 

If our enterprise customers experience inadequate performance with their wide area networks, even if unrelated to our systems, our product performance could be adversely affected, which could harm our relationships with current enterprise customers and make it more difficult to attract new enterprise customers.

          Our products depend on the reliable performance of the wide area networks of enterprise customers. If enterprise customers experience inadequate performance with their wide area networks, whether due to outages, component failures, or otherwise, our product performance would be adversely affected. As a result, when these types of problems occur with these networks, our enterprise customers may not be able to immediately identify the source of the problem, and may conclude that the problem is related to our

18


products. This could harm our relationships with our current enterprise customers and make it more difficult to attract new enterprise customers, which could harm our business.

 

 

 

We might require additional capital to support our business in the future, and this capital might not be available on acceptable terms, or at all.

          Although we anticipate that our current cash, cash equivalents and short-term investments on hand will be sufficient to meet our currently anticipated cash needs through fiscal 2010, if our cash and cash equivalents balances and any cash generated from operations and from our initial public offering are not sufficient to meet our future cash requirements, we will need to seek additional capital, potentially through debt or equity financings, to fund our operations. We may also need to raise additional capital to take advantage of new business or acquisition opportunities. We may seek to raise capital by, among other things:

 

 

 

 

issuing additional common stock or other equity securities;

 

 

 

 

issuing debt securities; or

 

 

 

 

borrowing funds under a credit facility.

          We may not be able to raise needed cash on terms acceptable to us or at all. Financings, if available, may be on terms that are dilutive or potentially dilutive to our stockholders, and the prices at which new investors would be willing to purchase our securities may be lower than the initial public offering price. The holders of new securities may also receive rights, preferences or privileges that are senior to those of existing holders of common stock. In addition, if we were to raise cash through a debt financing, such debt may impose conditions or restrictions on our operations, which could adversely affect our business. If new sources of financing are required but are insufficient or unavailable, we would be required to modify our operating plans to the extent of available funding, which would harm our ability to maintain or grow our business.

 

 

 

We are exposed to fluctuations in the market value of our money market funds and investments and financial pressure on investment institutions managing our investments may lead to restrictions on access to our investments which could harm our financial condition.

          We maintain an investment portfolio of various holdings and maturities. These securities are recorded on our consolidated balance sheets at fair value. This portfolio includes money market funds, bonds and commercial paper of various issuers. If the debt of these issuers is downgraded, the carrying value of these investments could be impaired. In addition, we could also face default risk from some of these issuers, which could also cause the carrying value to be impaired.

 

 

 

Our products include third-party technology and intellectual property, which could present additional risks.

          We incorporate certain third-party technologies, such as our contact center, collaboration bridge and network monitoring software, into our products, and intend to utilize additional third-party technologies in the future. However, licenses to relevant third-party technology or updates to those technologies may not continue to be available to us on commercially reasonable terms, or at all. Furthermore, we do not own the electronic design for our phones, so it may be difficult for us to arrange for an alternate of or a replacement for these products in a timely manner. Therefore, we could face delays in product releases until equivalent technology can be identified, licensed or developed, and integrated into our current products. These delays, if they occur, could materially adversely affect our business.

 

 

 

Failure to protect our intellectual property could substantially harm our business.

          Our success and ability to compete are substantially dependent upon our intellectual property. We rely on patent, trademark and copyright law, trade secret protection and confidentiality or license agreements with our employees, enterprise customers, strategic partners and others to protect our intellectual proprietary rights. However, the steps we take to protect our intellectual property rights may be inadequate. We currently have a small number of issued U.S. patents and a small number of patent applications pending in the U.S. and outside the U.S. We cannot assure you that any additional patents will be issued. Even if patents are issued, they may not adequately protect our intellectual property rights or our products against competitors, and third-parties may challenge the scope, validity and/or enforceability of our issued patents. In addition, other parties may independently develop similar or competing technologies designed around any patents that may be issued to us.

          In order to protect our intellectual property rights, we may be required to spend significant resources to monitor and protect such rights. We may not be able to detect infringement, and may lose our competitive position in the market before we are able to do so. In the event that we detect any infringement of our intellectual property rights, we intend to enforce such rights vigorously, and from time to time we may initiate claims against third parties that we believe are infringing on our intellectual property rights if we are unable to resolve matters satisfactorily through negotiation. Litigation brought to protect and enforce our intellectual property rights could be costly, time-consuming and distracting to management and could result in the impairment or loss of portions of our intellectual property. Furthermore, our efforts to enforce our intellectual property rights may be met with defenses, counterclaims and countersuits attacking the validity and enforceability of our intellectual property rights. Our failure to secure, protect and enforce our intellectual property rights could harm our brand and adversely impact our business, financial condition and results of operations.

19



 

 

 

If a third party asserts that we are infringing on its intellectual property, whether successful or not, it could subject us to costly and time-consuming litigation or expensive licenses, which could harm our business.

          There is considerable patent and other intellectual property development activity in our industry. Our success depends, in part, upon our not infringing upon the intellectual property rights of others. Our competitors, as well as a number of other entities and individuals, own or claim to own intellectual property relating to our industry and may have substantially larger and broader patent portfolios than we do. From time to time, third parties may claim that we are infringing upon their intellectual property rights, and we may be found to be infringing upon such rights. Third-parties have in the past sent us correspondence regarding their intellectual property and have filed litigation against us, and in the future we may receive claims that our products infringe or violate their intellectual property rights. In this regard, in 2007, Mitel Networks Corporation, one of our competitors, filed a lawsuit against us. Furthermore, we may be unaware of the intellectual property rights of others that may cover some or all of our technology or products. Any claims or litigation could cause us to incur significant expenses and, if successfully asserted against us, could require that we pay substantial damages or ongoing royalty payments, prevent us from selling our products, damage our reputation, or require that we comply with other unfavorable terms, any of which could materially harm our business. In addition, we may decide to pay substantial settlement costs in connection with any claim or litigation, whether or not successfully asserted against us. Even if we were to prevail, any litigation regarding our intellectual property could be costly and time-consuming and divert the attention of our management and key personnel from our business operations.

          Litigation with respect to intellectual property rights in the telecommunications industries is not uncommon and can often involve patent holding companies who have little or no product revenue and against whom our own patents may provide little or no deterrence. We may also be obligated to indemnify our enterprise customers or business partners in connection with any such litigation, which could further exhaust our resources. Furthermore, as a result of an intellectual property challenge, we may be required to enter into royalty, license or other agreements. We may not be able to obtain these agreements on terms acceptable to us or at all. We may have to incur substantial cost in re-designing our products to avoid infringement claims. In addition, disputes regarding our intellectual property rights may deter distributors from selling our products and dissuade potential enterprise customers from purchasing such products. As such, third-party claims with respect to intellectual property may increase our cost of goods sold or reduce the sales of our products, and may have a material and adverse effect on our business.

 

 

 

We face certain litigation risks.

          We are a party to certain lawsuits. Litigation can be lengthy, time-consuming, expensive, and disruptive to normal business operations and may divert management time and resources. The results of complex legal proceedings are difficult to predict. An unfavorable resolution of a particular lawsuit could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations or financial condition. In addition, we may incur higher general and administrative expenses than we have in the past in order to defend and prosecute this litigation, which could adversely affects our operating results. For additional information regarding the material lawsuits in which we are involved, see Item 3 “Legal Proceedings.”

 

 

 

If we fail to establish and maintain proper and effective internal control over financial reporting, our operating results and our ability to operate our business could be harmed.

          The Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 requires, among other things, that we establish and maintain internal control over financial reporting and disclosure controls and procedures. In particular, under the current rules of the SEC, beginning with the year ended June 30, 2008, we must perform system and process evaluation and testing of our internal control over financial reporting to allow management to report on the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting, as required by Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act. Our independent registered public accounting firm is also required to report on our internal control over financing reporting. Our and our auditor’s testing may reveal deficiencies in our internal control over financial reporting that are deemed to be material weaknesses and render our internal control over financial reporting ineffective. We have incurred and we expect to continue to incur substantial accounting and auditing expense and expend significant management time in complying with the requirements of Section 404. If we are not able to comply with the requirements of Section 404 in a timely manner, or if we or our independent registered public accounting firm identify deficiencies in our internal control over financial reporting that are deemed to be material weaknesses, the market price of our stock could decline and we could be subject to investigations or sanctions by the SEC, The NASDAQ Stock Market, or NASDAQ, or other regulatory authorities or subject to litigation. To the extent any material weaknesses in our internal control over financial reporting are identified in the future, we could be required to expend significant management time and financial resources to correct such material weaknesses or to respond to any resulting regulatory investigations or proceedings.

20



 

 

 

Our principal offices and the facilities of our contract manufacturers are located near known earthquake fault zones, and the occurrence of an earthquake or other catastrophic disaster could damage our facilities or the facilities of our contract manufacturers, which could cause us to curtail our operations.

          Our principal offices, our disaster recovery site, and the facilities of one of our contract manufacturers are located in California near known earthquake fault zones and, therefore, are vulnerable to damage from earthquakes. We and our contract manufacturers are also vulnerable to damage from other types of disasters, such as power loss, fire, floods and similar events. If any disaster were to occur, our ability to operate our business could be seriously impaired. In addition, we may not have adequate insurance to cover our losses resulting from disasters or other similar significant business interruptions. Any significant losses that are not recoverable under our insurance policies could seriously impair our business and financial condition.

Risks Related to Ownership of Our Common Stock

 

 

 

Our stock price in the past has been volatile, and may continue to be volatile or may decline regardless of our operating performance, and investors may not be able to resell shares at or above the price at which they purchased the shares.

          Our stock has been publicly traded for a relatively short period of time, having first begun trading in July 2007. During that time our stock price has fluctuated significantly, from a low of approximately $3 per share to a high of approximately $18 per share. At times the stock price has changed very quickly. For example, in January 2008, our stock price dropped from approximately $13 per share to approximately $6 per share, and as a result, we were named in the lawsuits described in Item 3. If investors purchase shares of our common stock, they may not be able to resell those shares at or above the price at which they purchased them. The market price of our common stock may fluctuate significantly in response to numerous factors, many of which are beyond our control, including:

 

 

 

 

fluctuations in the overall stock market;

 

 

 

 

the financial projections we may provide to the public, any changes in these projections or our failure to meet these projections;

 

 

 

 

actual or anticipated fluctuations in our operating results;

 

 

 

 

changes in operating performance and stock market valuations of other technology companies generally, or those that sell enterprise communication products in particular;

 

 

 

 

changes in financial estimates by any securities analysts who follow our company, our failure to meet these estimates or failure of those analysts to initiate or maintain coverage of our stock;

 

 

 

 

ratings downgrades by any securities analysts who follow our company;

 

 

 

 

the public’s response to our press releases or other public announcements, including our filings with the SEC;

 

 

 

 

announcements by us or our competitors of significant technical innovations, customer wins or losses, acquisitions, strategic partnerships, joint ventures or capital commitments;

 

 

 

 

introduction of technologies or product enhancements that reduce the need for our products;

 

 

 

 

market conditions or trends in our industry or the economy as a whole;

 

 

 

 

the loss of one or more key customers;

 

 

 

 

the loss of key personnel;

 

 

 

 

the development and sustainability of an active trading market for our common stock;

 

 

 

 

lawsuits threatened or filed against us and the outcome of such lawsuits;

 

 

 

 

future sales of our common stock by our officers, directors and significant stockholders; and

 

 

 

 

other events or factors, including those resulting from war, incidents of terrorism or responses to these events.

          In addition, the stock markets, and in particular the Nasdaq Global Market, have experienced extreme price and volume fluctuations that have affected and continue to affect the market prices of equity securities of many technology companies. Stock prices of many technology companies have fluctuated in a manner unrelated or disproportionate to the operating performance of those companies. In the past, stockholders have initiated securities class action litigation following declines in stock prices of technology companies. Our current litigation is, and any future litigation may, subject us to substantial costs, divert resources and the attention of management from our business, which could harm our business and operating results.

 

 

 

Future sales of outstanding shares of our common stock into the market in the future could cause the market price of our common stock to drop significantly, even if our business is doing well.

          Currently, more than 50% of our outstanding shares are held by our venture capital investors. If these investors or any of our existing stockholders sell a large number of shares of our common stock or the public market perceives that these sales may occur, the market price of our common stock could decline. All of our outstanding shares are freely tradable without restriction or further registration under the federal securities laws, subject in some cases to the volume, manner of sale and other limitations under Rule

21


144. In addition, pursuant to our investor rights agreement, some of our early investors may require us to register their shares for public sale which could result in a substantial volume of shares being sold in a short period of time. Due to these factors, sales of a substantial number of shares of our common stock in the public market could occur at any time. These sales, or the perception in the market that the holders of a large number of shares intend to sell shares, could reduce the market price of our common stock.

 

 

 

Our charter documents and Delaware law may inhibit a takeover that stockholders consider favorable and could also limit the market price of our stock.

          Our restated certificate of incorporation and bylaws and applicable provisions of Delaware law may make it more difficult for or prevent a third party from acquiring control of us without the approval of our board of directors. These provisions:

 

 

 

 

prohibit stockholder action by written consent, thereby requiring all stockholder actions to be taken at a meeting of our stockholders;

 

 

 

 

limit who may call a special meeting of stockholders;

 

 

 

 

establish a classified board of directors, so that not all members of our board of directors may be elected at one time;

 

 

 

 

provide our board of directors with the ability to designate the terms of and issue a new series of preferred stock without stockholder approval;

 

 

 

 

require the approval of two-thirds of the shares entitled to vote at an election of directors to adopt, amend or repeal our bylaws or repeal certain provisions of our certificate of incorporation;

 

 

 

 

allow a majority of the authorized number of directors to adopt, amend or repeal our bylaws without stockholder approval;

 

 

 

 

do not permit cumulative voting in the election of our directors, which would otherwise permit less than a majority of stockholders to elect directors; and

 

 

 

 

set limitations on the removal of directors.

          In addition, Section 203 of the Delaware General Corporation Law generally limits our ability to engage in any business combination with certain persons who own 15% or more of our outstanding voting stock or any of our associates or affiliates who at any time in the past three years have owned 15% or more of our outstanding voting stock. These provisions may have the effect of entrenching our management team and may deprive you of the opportunity to sell your shares to potential acquirers at a premium over prevailing prices. This potential inability to obtain a control premium could reduce the price of our common stock.

 

 

I TEM 1B.

UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS

          None.

 

 

I TEM 2.

PROPERTIES

          Our headquarters, which is located in Sunnyvale, California is a 63,781 square foot leased facility. We also occupy a 10,683 square foot leased facility in Austin, Texas, and other leased facilities located in Europe and in Australia.

          We maintain a shipping and warehouse facility in Fremont, California for our inventory and we rent space as needed at third-party warehouses. Our inventory is expected to be kept at our facility and at the third party facilities.

          We believe that our current facilities are suitable and adequate to meet our current needs, and we intend to add new facilities or expand existing facilities as we add employees. We believe that suitable additional or substitute space will be available on commercially reasonable terms as needed to accommodate our operations.

 

 

I TEM 3.

LEGAL PROCEEDINGS

          Information with respect to this item may be found in Note 12 to the Consolidated Financial Statements in Item 8, which is incorporated herein by reference.

 

 

I TEM 4.

SUBMISSION OF MATTERS TO A VOTE OF SECURITY HOLDERS

          None.

22


P ART II

 

 

ITEM 5.

MARKET FOR OUR COMMON STOCK AND RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS

Market Information

          Our common stock has been traded on The NASDAQ Global Market under the symbol “SHOR” since July 3, 2007. Prior to then, there was no public market for our common stock. The following table sets forth for the periods indicated the high and low sale prices of our common stock, as reported by The NASDAQ Global Market.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year Ending June 30, 2009

 

High

 

Low

 

 

 


 


 

First Quarter

 

$

6.50

 

$

3.87

 

Second Quarter

 

 

5.87

 

 

2.61

 

Third Quarter

 

 

5.18

 

 

3.63

 

Fourth Quarter

 

 

8.52

 

 

4.17

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year Ending June 30, 2008

 

High

 

Low

 

 

 


 


 

First Quarter (from July 3)

 

$

16.50

 

$

12.15

 

Second Quarter

 

 

18.32

 

 

13.25

 

Third Quarter

 

 

13.69

 

 

4.75

 

Fourth Quarter

 

 

5.64

 

 

4.42

 

          In the past, technology stocks have experienced high levels of volatility. The trading price of our common stock may fluctuate substantially. These fluctuations could cause you to lose all or part of your investment in our common stock. Factors that could cause fluctuations in the trading price of our common stock include the following:

 

 

 

 

price and volume fluctuations in the overall stock market from time to time;

 

 

 

 

significant volatility in the market price and trading volume of technology companies;

 

 

 

 

actual or anticipated changes in our results of operations or fluctuations in our operating results;

 

 

 

 

actual or anticipated changes in the expectations of investors or securities analysts;

 

 

 

 

actual or anticipated developments in our competitors’ businesses or the competitive landscape generally;

 

 

 

 

litigation involving us, our industry or both;

 

 

 

 

regulatory developments in the United States, foreign countries or both;

 

 

 

 

economic conditions and trends in our industry;

 

 

 

 

major catastrophic events;

 

 

 

 

sales of large blocks of our stock;

 

 

 

 

stock buy back programs; or

 

 

 

 

departures of key personnel.

          In the past, following periods of volatility in the market price of a company’s securities, securities class action litigation has often been brought against that company. If our stock price is volatile, we may become the target of securities litigation. Securities litigation could result in substantial costs and divert our management’s attention and resources from our business.

          On September 2, 2009, the last reported sales price of our common stock on the Nasdaq Global Market was $6.01 per share.

Holders of Record

          As of September 2, 2009, there were 150 stockholders of record of our common stock, although we believe there are approximately 1,700 beneficial owners since many brokers and other institutions hold our common stock on behalf of stockholders.

Dividend Policy

          We have never declared or paid dividends on our common stock. We intend to retain any future earnings for use in our business and therefore we do not anticipate declaring or paying any cash dividends in the foreseeable future.

Sales of Unregistered Securities

          None.

23


Use of Proceeds from Public Offering of Common Stock

          The effective date of the registration statement for our initial public offering was July 2, 2007. As of June 30, 2009, the proceeds from our initial public offering were primarily invested in cash, cash equivalents and short term investments. None of the use of the proceeds was made, directly or indirectly, to our directors, officers, or persons owning 10% or more of our common stock.

Performance Graph 

          The following graph shows the cumulative total stockholder return of an investment of $100 in cash on July 3, 2007, the date our common stock first started trading on the NASDAQ National Market through June 30, 2009, for (i) our common stock, (ii) the S&P 500 Index and (iii) the NASDAQ Telecommunications Index. Pursuant to applicable SEC rules, all values assume reinvestment of the full amount of all dividends, however no dividends have been declared on our common stock to date. The stockholder return shown on the graph below is not necessarily indicative of future performance, and we do not make or endorse any predictions as to future stockholder returns.

(LINE GRAPH)


This Section is not “soliciting material,” is not deemed “filed” with the SEC and is not to be incorporated by reference in any filing of ShoreTel, Inc. under the 1933 Act or the 1934 Act whether made before or after the date hereof and irrespective of any general incorporation language in any such filing.

24


Equity Compensation Plan Information

          The following table summarizes information about our equity compensation plans as of June 30, 2009. All outstanding awards relate to our common stock.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Plan Category

 

Number of
Securities to
be Issued
upon
Exercise of
Outstanding
Options,
Warrants
and Rights
(a)

 

Weighted
Average
Exercise
Price of
Outstanding
Options,
Warrants
and Rights
(b)

 

Number of
Securities
Remaining
Available for
Future
Issuances
under Equity
Compensation
Plans
(Excluding
Securities
Reflected in
Column (a))
(c)

 


 


 


 


 

Equity compensation plans approved by security holders(1)

 

7,765,000

 

$

3.91

 

4,036,000

 

Equity compensation plans not approved by security holders

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


 

 

 

 


 

Total

 

7,765,000

 

$

3.91

 

4,036,000

 

 

 


 

 

 

 


 

 

 


(1)

The number of securities remaining available for future issuance in column (c) includes 4,036,000 shares of common stock authorized and available for issuance under our 2007 Employee Stock Purchase Plan (“ESPP”) and our 2007 Equity Incentive Plan (the “2007 Plan”). The number of shares authorized for issuance under the ESPP is subject to an annual increase equal to 1% of the outstanding shares on the date of the annual increase or an amount determined by the Board of Directors and the number of shares authorized for issuance under the 2007 Plan is subject to an annual increase equal to 5% of the outstanding shares on the date of the annual increase or an amount determined by the Board of Directors. The number of securities to be issued to participants in column (a) does not include shares of common stock to be issued to participants in consideration of aggregate participant contributions under the ESPP as of June 30, 2009.


 

 

I TEM 6.

SELECTED CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL DATA

          The following selected financial data should be read in connection with our consolidated financial statements and notes thereto and “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” included elsewhere in this Annual Report on Form 10-K. Our historical results are not necessarily indicative of the results to be expected in any future period.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year Ended June 30,

 

 

 


 

 

 

2009

 

2008

 

2007

 

2006

 

2005

 

 

 


 


 


 


 


 

 

 

(In thousands, except per share amounts)

 

Revenue:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Product

 

$

109,555

 

$

110,496

 

$

87,095

 

$

55,300

 

$

31,970

 

Support and services

 

 

25,267

 

 

18,233

 

 

10,732

 

 

6,308

 

 

3,512

 

 

 



 



 



 



 



 

Total revenue

 

 

134,822

 

 

128,729

 

 

97,827

 

 

61,608

 

 

35,482

 

Cost of revenue:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Product(1)

 

 

38,142

 

 

37,451

 

 

29,751

 

 

21,855

 

 

13,961

 

Support and services(1)

 

 

10,965

 

 

9,994

 

 

6,837

 

 

5,425

 

 

2,907

 

 

 



 



 



 



 



 

Total cost of revenue

 

 

49,107

 

 

47,445

 

 

36,588

 

 

27,280

 

 

16,868

 

 

 



 



 



 



 



 

Gross profit

 

 

85,715

 

 

81,284

 

 

61,239

 

 

34,328

 

 

18,614

 

Operating expenses:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Research and development(1)

 

 

30,587

 

 

26,691

 

 

17,224

 

 

9,720

 

 

7,034

 

Sales and marketing(1)

 

 

44,306

 

 

37,780

 

 

26,126

 

 

15,699

 

 

10,050

 

General and administrative(1)

 

 

19,306

 

 

17,420

 

 

11,673

 

 

4,936

 

 

3,045

 

Litigation settlement

 

 

4,110

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 



 



 



 



 



 

Total operating expenses

 

 

98,309

 

 

81,891

 

 

55,023

 

 

30,355

 

 

20,129

 

 

 



 



 



 



 



 

Operating income (loss)

 

 

(12,594

)

 

(607

)

 

6,216

 

 

3,973

 

 

(1,515

)

Other income — net

 

 

1,141

 

 

4,101

 

 

273

 

 

248

 

 

124

 

 

 



 



 



 



 



 

Income (loss) before provision for income tax

 

 

(11,453

)

 

3,494

 

 

6,489

 

 

4,221

 

 

(1,391

)

Income tax provision

 

 

(343

)

 

(861

)

 

(408

)

 

(219

)

 

(11

)

 

 



 



 



 



 



 

Net income (loss)

 

 

(11,796

)

 

2,633

 

 

6,081

 

 

4,002

 

 

(1,402

)

Accretion of preferred stock

 

 

 

 

 

 

(50

)

 

(51

)

 

(32

)

 

 



 



 



 



 



 

25



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year Ended June 30,

 

 

 


 

 

 

2009

 

2008

 

2007

 

2006

 

2005

 

 

 


 


 


 


 


 

 

 

(In thousands, except per share amounts)

 

Net income (loss) available to common stockholders

 

$

(11,796

)

$

2,633

 

$

6,031

 

$

3,951

 

$

(1,434

)

 

 



 



 



 



 



 

Net income (loss) per common share available to common stockholders(2):

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Basic

 

$

(0.27

)

$

0.06

 

$

0.70

 

$

0.60

 

$

(0.27

)

 

 



 



 



 



 



 

Diluted

 

$

(0.27

)

$

0.06

 

$

0.17

 

$

0.12

 

$

(0.27

)

 

 



 



 



 



 



 

Shares used in computing net income (loss) per share available to common stockholders:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Basic

 

 

43,714

 

 

42,413

 

 

8,565

 

 

6,609

 

 

5,352

 

Diluted

 

 

43,714

 

 

44,861

 

 

35,581

 

 

33,431

 

 

5,352

 


 

 


(1)

Includes stock-based compensation expense as follows:


 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year Ended June 30,

 

 

 


 

 

 

2009

 

2008

 

2007

 

2006

 

2005

 

 

 


 


 


 


 


 

 

 

(In thousands)

 

Cost of product revenue

 

$

106

 

$

59

 

$

12

 

$

 

$

 

Cost of support and services revenue

 

 

716

 

 

503

 

 

99

 

 

16

 

 

 

Research and development

 

 

2,692

 

 

1,885

 

 

384

 

 

14

 

 

 

Sales and marketing

 

 

3,122

 

 

2,358

 

 

533

 

 

7

 

 

 

General and administrative

 

 

2,259

 

 

2,135

 

 

1,658

 

 

45

 

 

82

 

 

 



 



 



 



 



 

Total stock-based compensation expense

 

$

8,895

 

$

6,940

 

$

2,686

 

$

82

 

$

82

 

 

 



 



 



 



 



 


 

 

(2)

See Note 5 to our consolidated financial statements for a description of the method used to compute basic and diluted net income (loss) per share available to common stockholders.


 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

As of June 30,

 

 

 


 

 

 

2009

 

2008

 

2007

 

2006

 

2005

 

 

 


 


 


 


 


 

 

 

(In thousands)

 

Consolidated balance sheet data:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash and cash equivalents and short-term investments

 

$

107,666

 

$

102,811

 

$

17,326

 

$

12,333

 

$

5,373

 

Working capital

 

 

111,617

 

 

111,993

 

 

23,018

 

 

16,208

 

 

10,741

 

Total assets

 

 

155,624

 

 

147,797

 

 

53,034

 

 

30,885

 

 

20,960

 

Redeemable convertible preferred stock

 

 

 

 

 

 

56,341

 

 

56,332

 

 

56,281

 

Total stockholders’ equity (deficit)

 

 

113,772

 

 

113,213

 

 

(31,829

)

 

(41,168

)

 

(45,713

)


 

 

ITEM 7.

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

          The following discussion and analysis of our financial condition and results of operations should be read in conjunction with the consolidated financial statements and related notes included elsewhere in this document. This discussion contains forward-looking statements that involve risks and uncertainties. Our actual results could differ materially from those discussed below. Factors that could cause or contribute to such differences include, but are not limited to, those identified below, and those discussed above in the section entitled “Risk Factors.” We report results on a fiscal year ending June 30. For ease of reference within this section, 2009 refers to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2009, 2008 refers to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2008, and 2007 refers to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2007.

Overview

          We are a leading provider of IP telecommunications solutions for enterprises. Our solution is comprised of our ShoreGear switches, ShorePhone IP phones and ShoreWare software applications. We were founded in September 1996 and shipped our first system in 1998. We have continued to develop and enhance our product line since that time. We currently offer a variety of models of our switches and IP phones.

          We sell our products primarily through channel partners that market and sell our systems to enterprises across all industries, including to small, medium and large companies and public institutions. We believe our channel strategy allows us to reach a larger number of prospective enterprise customers more effectively than if we were to sell directly. The number of our authorized channel partners has more than doubled since June 30, 2004 to over 700 as of June 30, 2009. Channel partners typically purchase our products

26


directly from us. Our internal sales and marketing personnel support these channel partners in their selling efforts. In some circumstances, the enterprise customer will purchase products directly from us, but in these situations we typically compensate the channel partner for its sales efforts. At the request of the channel partner, we often ship our products directly to the enterprise customer.

          Most channel partners generally perform installation and implementation services for the enterprises that use our systems. In most cases, our channel partners provide the post-contractual support to the enterprise customer by providing first-level support services and purchasing additional services from us under a post-contractual support contract. For channel partners without support capabilities or that do not desire to provide support, we offer full support contracts to provide all of the support to enterprise customers.

          We outsource the manufacturing of our products to contract manufacturers. Our outsourced manufacturing model allows us to scale our business without the significant capital investment and on-going expenses required to establish and maintain a manufacturing operation. Our phone and switch products are manufactured by contract manufacturers located in California and in China. Our contract manufacturers provide us with a range of operational and manufacturing services, including component procurement, final testing and assembly of our products. We work closely with our contract manufacturers to manage the cost of components, since our total manufacturing costs are directly tied to component costs. We regularly provide forecasts to our contract manufacturers, and we order products from our contract manufacturers based on our projected sales levels well in advance of receiving actual orders from our enterprise customers. We seek to maintain sufficient levels of finished goods inventory to meet our forecasted product sales with limited levels of inventory to compensate for unanticipated shifts in sales volume and product mix.

          Although we have historically sold our systems primarily to small and medium sized enterprises, we expanded our sales and marketing activities to increase our focus on larger enterprise customers. Accordingly, we have a major accounts program whereby our sales personnel assist our channel partners to sell to large enterprise accounts, and we coordinate with our channel partners to enable them to better serve large multi-site enterprises. To the extent we are successful in penetrating larger enterprise customers, we expect that the sales cycle for our products will increase, and that the demands on our sales and support infrastructure will also increase.

          We are headquartered in Sunnyvale, California and the majority of our personnel work at this location. Sales and support personnel are located throughout the United States and, to a lesser extent, in the United Kingdom, Germany, Belgium, Spain, Hong Kong, Singapore and Australia. Most of our enterprise customers are located in the United States. Revenue from international sales has been less than 10% of our total revenue for 2009, 2008, and 2007, respectively. Although we intend to focus on increasing international sales, we expect that sales to enterprise customers in the United States will continue to comprise the significant majority of our sales.

          We have experienced some growth despite the economic recession, with our total revenue growing to $134.8 million for 2009 from $128.7 million for 2008. This growth in revenue has largely been driven by increased revenue from support and services. Our operating expenses have increased significantly to $98.3 million for 2009 from $81.9 million for 2008. This increase in operating expenses is primarily a result of a 2009 litigation settlement, restructuring costs, increases in advertising and promotion expense, facilities expenses, and compensation expense. Compensation expense included increases in stock-based compensation and commissions and reflected higher headcount. We increased headcount from 365 at June 30, 2008 to 375 at June 30, 2009. We expect to continue to add personnel primarily in our sales and customer support areas.

Key Business Metrics

          We monitor a number of key metrics to help forecast growth, establish budgets, measure the effectiveness of sales and marketing efforts and measure operational effectiveness.

           Initial and repeat sales orders. Our goal is to attract a significant number of new enterprise customers and to encourage existing enterprise customers to purchase additional products and support. Many enterprise customers make an initial purchase and deploy additional sites at a later date, and also buy additional products and support as their businesses expand. As our installed enterprise customer base has grown we have experienced an increase in orders attributable to existing enterprise customers, which currently represents a significant portion of our total revenue. For fiscal year 2009 order volume from existing enterprise customers represented approximately 54% of total order volume, while in fiscal year 2007 and 2008 it has been approximately 50%.

           Deferred revenue. Deferred revenue relates to the timing of revenue recognition for specific transactions based on service, support, specific commitments and other factors. Deferred revenue primarily consists of billings or payments received in advance of revenue recognition from the Company’s transactions described above and are recognized as the revenue recognition criteria are met. Nearly all system sales include the purchase of post-contractual support contracts with terms of up to five years, and our renewal rates on these contracts have been high historically. We recognize support revenue on a ratable basis over the term of the support contract. Since we receive payment for support in advance of our recognizing the related revenue, we carry a deferred revenue balance on our consolidated balance sheet. This deferred revenue helps provide predictability to our future support and services revenue. Accordingly, the level of purchases of post-contractual support with our product sales is an important metric for us along with the renewal rates for these services. Our renewal rate on post contractual support contracts was approximately 80% in fiscal year 2009.

27


Our deferred revenue balance at June 30, 2009 was $22.5 million, of which $15.3 million is expected to be recognized within one year.

           Gross margin. Our gross margin for products is primarily affected by our ability to reduce hardware costs faster than the decline in average overall system prices. We strive to increase our product gross margin by reducing hardware costs through product redesign and volume discount pricing from our suppliers. In general, product gross margin on our switches is greater than product gross margin on our IP phones. As the prices and costs of our hardware components have decreased over time, our software components, which have lower costs than our hardware components, have represented a greater percentage of our overall margin on system sales. We consider our ability to monitor and manage these factors to be a key aspect of maintaining product gross margins and increasing our profitability.

          Gross margin for support and services is slightly lower than gross margin for products, and is impacted primarily by personnel costs and labor related expenses. The primary goal of our support and services function is to ensure a high level of customer satisfaction and our investments in support personnel and infrastructure are made with this goal in mind. We expect that as our installed enterprise customer base grows, we will be able to improve gross margin for support and services through economies of scale. However, the timing of additional investments in our support and services infrastructure could materially affect our cost of support and services revenue, both in absolute dollars and as a percentage of support and services revenue and total revenue, in any particular period.

           Operating expense management. Our operating expenses are comprised primarily of compensation and benefits for our employees and, therefore, the increase in operating expenses has been primarily related to increase in our headcount. In recent periods, litigation costs have also adversely affected our operating costs, although with the settlement of the Mitel litigation, we expect these costs to decrease substantially. We intend to expand our workforce to support our anticipated growth, and therefore our ability to forecast revenue is critical to managing our operating expenses.

Basis of Presentation

          Revenue. We derive our revenue from sales of our IP telecommunications systems and related support and services. Our typical system includes a combination of IP phones, switches and software applications. Channel partners buy our products directly from us. Prices to a given channel partner for hardware and software products depend on that channel partner’s volume and customer satisfaction metrics, as well as our own strategic considerations. In circumstances where we sell directly to the enterprise customer in transactions that have been assisted by channel partners, we report our revenue net of any associated payment to the channel partners that assisted in such sales. This results in recognized revenue from a direct sale approximating the revenue that would have been recognized from a sale of a comparable system through a channel partner. Product revenue has accounted for 81%, 86%, and 89% of our total revenue for 2009, 2008 and 2007, respectively.

          Support and services revenue primarily consists of post-contractual support, and to a lesser extent revenue from training services, professional services and installations that we perform. Post-contractual support includes software updates which grant rights to unspecified software license upgrades and maintenance releases issued during the support period. Post-contractual support also includes both Internet- and phone-based technical support. Post-contractual support revenue is recognized ratably over the contractual service period.

           Cost of revenue. Cost of product revenue consists primarily of hardware costs, royalties and license fees for third-party software included in our systems, salary and related overhead costs of operations personnel, freight, warranty costs and provision for excess inventory. The majority of these costs vary with the unit volumes of product sold. Cost of support and services revenue consists of salary and related overhead costs of personnel engaged in support and services.

     Research and development expenses. Research and development expenses primarily include personnel costs, outside engineering costs, professional services, prototype costs, test equipment, software usage fees and facilities expenses. Research and development expenses are recognized when incurred. We capitalize software development costs incurred from determination of technological feasibility through general release of the product to customers. Research and development capitalized and shown under other assets was $0.5 million, $0 and $0 in fiscal 2009, 2008, and 2007, respectively.

          We are devoting substantial resources to the development of additional functionality for existing products and the development of new products and related software applications. We intend to continue to make significant investments in our research and development efforts because we believe they are essential to maintaining and improving our competitive position. Accordingly, we expect research and development expenses to continue to increase in absolute dollars.

           Sales and marketing expenses. Sales and marketing expenses primarily include personnel costs, sales commissions, travel, marketing promotional and lead generation programs, advertising, trade shows, demo equipment, professional services fees and facilities expenses. We plan to continue to invest in development of our distribution channel by increasing the size of our field sales force and the number of our channel partners to enable us to expand into new geographies, including Europe and Asia Pacific, and further increase our sales to large enterprises. In conjunction with channel growth, we plan to increase the investment in our training and support of channel partners to enable them to more effectively sell our products. We also plan to continue investing in our

28


domestic and international marketing activities to help build brand awareness and create sales leads for our channel partners. We expect that sales and marketing expenses will increase in absolute dollars and remain our largest operating expense category.

           General and administrative expenses. General and administrative expenses relate to our executive, finance, human resources, legal and information technology organizations. Expenses primarily include personnel costs, professional fees for legal, accounting, tax, compliance and information systems, travel, recruiting expense, software amortization costs, depreciation expense and facilities expenses. In addition, as we expand our business, we expect to increase our general and administrative expenses.

           Other income (expense). Other income (expense) primarily consists of interest earned on cash and short-term investments and other miscellaneous income (expenses).

          Income tax provision. Income tax provision includes federal, state and foreign tax on our income. From inception through 2005, we accumulated substantial net operating loss and tax credit carryforwards. We account for income taxes under an asset and liability approach. Deferred income taxes reflect the impact of temporary differences between assets and liabilities recognized for financial reporting purposes and such amounts recognized for income tax reporting purposes, net operating loss carry-forwards and other tax credits measured by applying currently enacted tax laws. Valuation allowances are provided when necessary to reduce deferred tax assets to an amount that is more likely than not to be realized.

          We believe we have had multiple ownership changes, as defined under Section 382 of the Internal Revenue Code, due to significant stock transactions in previous years, which limits the realization of our net operating losses and tax credit carryforwards under Sections 382 and 383 of the Internal Revenue Code in future periods. Based on our final analysis performed in 2008, we believe the provisions of Section 382 results in the forfeiture of significant amount of federal and California net operating loss carry-forward and research and development tax credit carry-forwards.

29


           Results of Operations

          The following table sets forth selected consolidated statements of operations data as a percentage of total revenue for each of the periods indicated.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year Ended June 30,

 

 

 


 

 

 

2009

 

2008

 

2007

 

 

 


 


 


 

Revenue:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Product

 

 

81

%

 

86

%

 

89

%

Support and services

 

 

19

%

 

14

%

 

11

%

 

 



 



 



 

Total revenue

 

 

100

%

 

100

%

 

100

%

Cost of revenue:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Product

 

 

28

%

 

29

%

 

30

%

Support and services

 

 

8

%

 

8

%

 

7

%

 

 



 



 



 

Total cost of revenue

 

 

36

%

 

37

%

 

37

%

 

 



 



 



 

Gross profit

 

 

64

%

 

63

%

 

63

%

Operating expenses:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Research and development

 

 

23

%

 

21

%

 

18

%

Sales and marketing

 

 

33

%

 

29

%

 

27

%

General and administrative

 

 

14

%

 

13

%

 

12

%

Litigation settlement

 

 

3

%

 

 

 

 

 

 



 



 



 

Total operating expenses

 

 

73

%

 

63

%

 

57

%

 

 



 



 



 

Operating income (loss)

 

 

(9

)%

 

 

 

6

%

Other income, net

 

 

1

%

 

3

%

 

 

 

 



 



 



 

Income (loss) before provision for income tax

 

 

(8

)%

 

3

%

 

6

%

Provision for income taxes

 

 

(1

)%

 

(1

)%

 

 

 

 



 



 



 

Net income (loss)

 

 

(9

)%

 

2

%

 

6

%

 

 



 



 



 

          Fiscal 2009 compared to Fiscal 2008

          Revenue.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year ended

 

 

 

 

 


 

Change

 

 

 

June 30,

 

June 30,

 


 

 

 

2009

 

2008

 

$

 

%

 

 

 


 


 


 


 

 

 

(in thousands, except percentages)

 

Revenue

 

$

134,822

 

$

128,729

 

$

6,093

 

 

5

%

          The increase was primarily attributable to increased support and services revenue. Support and services revenue was $25.3 million in 2009, an increase of $7.1 million, or 39%, from $18.2 million in 2008, as a result of a $5.5 million increase in revenue associated with post-contractual support contracts accompanying new system sales, post-contractual support contract renewals, a $0.7 million increase in installations revenue and a $0.6 million increase in training services revenue. Product revenue declined marginally to $109.6 million in 2009 from $110.5 million in 2008 due to a decrease in revenue from ShoreGear switches, IP phones and software licenses, all of which had slight decline in average selling prices, partially offset by higher volumes. The average selling price decline was primarily driven by increased discounting due to the world wide economic recession that reduced the level of IT capital spending at enterprises and specifically impacted the IP Telephony market which has declined significantly in the last year.

          Gross margin.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year ended

 

 

 

 

 


 

Change

 

 

 

June 30,

 

June 30,

 


 

 

 

2009

 

2008

 

$

 

%

 

 

 


 


 


 


 

 

 

(in thousands, except percentages)

 

Cost of revenue

 

$

49,107

 

$

47,445

 

$

1,662

 

 

4

%

Gross profit

 

$

85,715

 

$

81,284

 

$

4,431

 

 

5

%

Gross margin

 

 

63.6

%

 

63.1

%

 

n/a

 

 

1

%

          The increase in gross margin was attributable to an increase in support and services gross margin from 45% in 2008 to 57% in 2009. This increase was partially offset by a decline in product gross margin from 66% in 2008 to 65% in 2009 due to a decline in average selling price of our ShoreGear Switches of 10% and a decline in our IP Phones of 2%. Support and services gross margin increased due to support and services revenue increasing by 39% and service costs only increasing by 10%, compared to the same period in 2008. The service costs increase was limited to 10% as the Company deployed employee resources to a lower cost region

30


outside of our California headquarters office. Compensation for support and services employees, the largest category of support and service costs, increased 16% in 2009, primarily due to an increase in stock-based compensation and an increase in headcount from 52 employees at June 30, 2008 to 55 employees at June 30, 2009.

          Operating expenses.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year ended

 

 

 

 

 


 

Change

 

 

 

June 30,

 

June 30,

 


 

 

 

2009

 

2008

 

$

 

%

 

 

 


 


 


 


 

 

 

(in thousands, except percentages)

 

Operating expenses:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Research and development

 

$

30,587

 

$

26,691

 

$

3,896

 

 

15

%

Sales and marketing

 

$

44,306

 

$

37,780

 

$

6,526

 

 

17

%

General and administrative

 

$

19,306

 

$

17,420

 

$

1,886

 

 

11

%

Litigation settlement

 

$

4,110

 

$

 

$

4,110

 

 

n/a

 

          Research and development . These expenses represented 23% and 21% of total revenue in 2009 and 2008, respectively. Compensation, including stock-based compensation, for research and development employees accounted for $4.1 million of the increase, primarily as a result of increased headcount during the year. The increase in research and development expenses also included $0.2 million each in legal expenses associated with trademark & patent costs and in depreciation, $0.5 million in facilities, $0.3 million corporate bonus and $0.1 million each in travel and software expenses. These increases were primarily offset by a decrease of $1.1 million in non-recurring engineering expenses, and decreases of $0.3 million each in issued equipment expenses related to usage in beta programs and in consulting and professional services.

          Sales and marketing. These expenses represented 33% and 29% of total revenue in 2009 and 2008, respectively. Compensation, including stock-based compensation for sales and marketing employees represented $4.7 million of the increase. The increase in sales and marketing compensation included increases of $0.8 million in stock-based compensation, $1.5 million in commissions and $2.4 million due to increased headcount during the year. Additional increase in sales and marketing expenses included increases of $0.2 million each in restructuring expenses, consulting expenses, facilities expenses, and in travel expenses, and $1.1 million in promotional expenses.

          General and administrative . These expenses represented 14% and 13% of total revenue in 2009 and 2008, respectively. Compensation for general and administrative employees, including stock-based compensation, accounted for $0.5 million of the increase. Additional increases in general and administrative expenses included $0.8 million in the provision for doubtful accounts, $0.1 million each in depreciation expense, employee relations expenses, equipment expenses and restructuring expenses, $0.3 million in sales tax expense and $0.2 million each in telecom and in legal expenses. These increases were partially offset by a decrease of $0.3 million in facilities expenses and $0.2 million in corporate bonus expense.

          Litigation Settlement. We recorded a charge of $4.1 million as a result of the agreement to settle our litigation with Mitel in April 2009.

          Other income

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year ended

 

 

 

 

 


 

Change

 

 

 

June 30,

 

June 30,

 


 

 

 

2009

 

2008

 

$

 

%

 

 

 


 


 


 


 

 

 

(in thousands, except percentages)

 

Other Income, net

 

$

1,141

 

$

4,101

 

$

(2,960

)

 

(72

)%

          Other income. Other income is primarily composed of interest earned on our cash and cash equivalents and short-term investments and foreign currency translation gains and losses. The decrease in other income is primarily attributable to reduced interest rates earned on relatively stable cash and investment balances. Interest income decreased $2.8 million, or 66%, from 2008 to 2009 due to substantially lower interest rates. In addition, foreign currency translation losses increased $0.2 million in 2009 compared to 2008.

           Income tax provision.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year ended

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


 

Change

 

 

 

June 30,

 

June 30,

 


 

 

 

2009

 

2008

 

$

 

%

 

 

 


 


 


 


 

 

 

(in thousands, except percentages)

 

Tax provision

 

$

343

 

$

861

 

$

(518

)

 

(60

)%

31


          Income tax provision. The income tax provision was $0.3 million in 2009, a decrease of $0.6 million, from approximately $0.9 million in 2008. We incurred a loss before provision for income tax in 2009; however, due to differences related to book vs. tax, we generated taxable income in 2009 and accordingly, we recorded an income tax provision in 2009. We were profitable in 2008 and had an effective tax rate of approximately 24.6% as a result of utilizing portions of the deferred tax asset and reducing the related valuation allowance.

Fiscal 2008 compared to Fiscal 2007

          Revenue.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year ended

 

 

 

 

 


 

Change

 

 

 

June 30,

 

June 30,

 


 

 

 

2008

 

2007

 

$

 

%

 

 

 


 


 


 


 

 

 

(in thousands, except percentages)

 

Revenue

 

$

128,729

 

$

97,827

 

$

30,902

 

 

32

%

          The revenue growth in 2008 was primarily attributable to increased sales of our products and services. Product revenue was $110.5 million in 2008, an increase of $23.4 million, or 27%, from $87.1 million in 2007. Support and services revenue was $18.2 million in 2008, an increase of $7.5 million, or 70%, from $10.7 million in 2007, as a result of increased revenue associated with post-contractual support contracts accompanying new system sales, post-contractual support contract renewals and increased revenue from training services and installations.

          Gross margin.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year ended

 

 

 

 

 


 

Change

 

 

 

June 30,

 

June 30,

 


 

 

 

2008

 

2007

 

$

 

%

 

 

 


 


 


 


 

 

 

(in thousands, except percentages)

 

Cost of revenue

 

$

47,445

 

$

36,588

 

$

10,857

 

 

30

%

Gross profit

 

$

81,284

 

$

61,239

 

$

20,045

 

 

33

%

Gross margin

 

 

63.1

%

 

62.6

%

 

n/a

 

 

1

%

          In 2008, the increase in total gross margin was attributable to support and services gross margin of 45% compared to 36% in 2007. Support and services gross margin increased due to support and services revenue increasing by 70% and service costs only increasing 46%, compared to the same period in 2007. Compensation for support and services employees, the largest category of support and service costs, increased 33% in 2008, as headcount increased from 42 employees at June 30, 2007 to 52 employees at June 30, 2008. The product gross margin remained at 66% in 2008 and 2007.

          Operating expenses.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year ended

 

 

 

 

 


 

Change

 

 

 

June 30,

 

June 30,

 


 

 

 

2008

 

2007

 

$

 

%

 

 

 


 


 


 


 

 

 

(in thousands, except percentages)

 

Research and development

 

$

26,691

 

$

17,224

 

$

9,467

 

 

55

%

Sales and marketing

 

$

37,780

 

$

26,126

 

$

11,654

 

 

45

%

General and administrative

 

$

17,420

 

$

11,673

 

$

5,747

 

 

49

%

          Research and development. These expenses represented 21% and 18% of total revenue in 2008 and 2007, respectively. Compensation, including stock-based compensation, for research and development employees accounted for $6.3 million of the increase, primarily as a result of an increase in headcount to 125 employees at June 30, 2008, from 102 employees at June 30, 2007. Additional increases research and development expenses included $1.6 million in outside engineering charges, $0.8 million in facilities costs and $0.3 million in consulting and professional services.

          Sales and marketing. These expenses represented 29% and 27% of total revenue in 2008 and 2007, respectively. Compensation, including stock-based compensation for sales and marketing employees represented $7.9 million of the increase, primarily as a result of an increase in headcount, to 127 employees at June 30, 2008 from 94 employees at June 30, 2007. Additional increases in sales and marketing expenses included $1.0 million in travel and entertainment, $0.4 million in consulting and temporary labor costs, $0.2 million each in trade shows, marketing cooperative advertising, and in depreciation expense and $0.3 million each in public relations, issued equipment and facilities expenses.

32


          General and administrative. These expenses represented 13% and 12% of total revenue in 2008 and 2007, respectively. Compensation for general and administrative employees, including stock-based compensation, accounted for $3.3 million of the increase, primarily as a result of an increase in headcount, to 42 employees at June 30, 2008 from 33 employees at June 30, 2007. Increases in general and administrative expenses included $1.5 million in legal expenses including litigation expenses, $0.8 million in office rent expense, $0.4 million in insurance, and $0.3 million in depreciation. These increases were partially offset by decreases of $0.4 million in recruiting costs and $0.1 million in software license and maintenance fees.

          Other income (expense).

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year ended

 

 

 

 

 


 

Change

 

 

 

June 30,

 

June 30,

 


 

 

 

2008

 

2007

 

$

 

%

 

 

 


 


 


 


 

 

 

(in thousands, except percentages)

 

Other Income, net

 

$

4,101

 

$

273

 

$

3,828

 

 

1402

%

          Other income (expense). The increase is primarily attributable to increase in interest income by $3.3 million on account of higher cash and investment balances in 2008 as compared to 2007. Additionally, in 2007 there were expenses of $0.5 million associated with an increase in fair value of preferred stock warrants that were converted in connection with our initial public offering that were partially offset against other income.

          Income tax provision.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year ended

 

 

 

 

 


 

Change

 

 

 

June 30,

 

June 30,

 


 

 

 

2008

 

2007

 

$

 

%

 

 

 


 


 


 


 

 

 

(in thousands, except percentages)

 

Tax provision

 

$

861

 

$

408

 

$

453

 

 

111

%

          Income tax provision. The income tax provision was $0.9 million in 2008, an increase of $0.5 million, from $0.4 million in 2007, primarily due to an increase in our effective tax rate from 6.3% to 24.6%.

Liquidity and Capital Resources

     Cash and Cash Equivalents and Investments.

          The following table summarizes our cash and cash equivalents and short-term investments (in thousands):

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year ended June 30,

 

 

 


 

 

 

2009

 

2008

 

2007

 

 

 






 

Cash and cash equivalents

 

$

73,819

 

$

68,672

 

$

17,326

 

Short-term investments

 

 

33,847

 

 

34,139

 

 

 

 

 



 



 



 

Total

 

$

107,666

 

$

102,811

 

$

17,326

 

 

 



 



 



 

          As of June 30, 2009, our principal sources of liquidity consisted of cash and cash equivalents and short-term investments of $107.7 million and net accounts receivable of $21.5 million.

          Our principal uses of cash historically have consisted of the purchase of finished goods inventory from our contract manufacturers, payroll and other operating expenses related to the development of new products and purchases of property and equipment.

          We believe that our $107.7 million of cash and cash equivalents and short-term investments at June 30, 2009, together with cash flows from our operations will be sufficient to fund our operating requirements for at least the next 12 months. Our future capital requirements will depend on many factors, including our rate of revenue growth, the expansion of our sales and marketing activities, the timing and extent of our expansion into new territories, the timing of introductions of new products and enhancements to existing products, the continuing market acceptance of our products and acquisition activities. We may enter into agreements relating to potential investments in, or acquisitions of, complementary businesses or technologies in the future, which could also require us to seek additional equity or debt financing. Additional funds may not be available on terms favorable to us or at all.

          The following table shows our cash flows from operating activities, investing activities and financing activities for the stated periods:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year Ended June 30,

 

 

 


 

 

 

2009

 

2008

 

2007

 

 

 


 


 


 

 

 

(In thousands)

 

Cash provided by operating activities

 

$

7,447

 

$

8,153

 

$

7,910

 

Cash used in investing activities

 

$

(5,494

)

$

(36,519

)

$

(2,224

)

Cash provided by (used in) financing activities

 

$

3,194

 

$

79,712

 

$

(693

)

33


     Cash flows from operating activities

          Our cash flows from operating activities are significantly influenced by our cash expenditures to support the growth of our business in areas such as research and development, sales and marketing and administration. Our operating cash flows are also influenced by our working capital needs to support growth and fluctuations in inventory, accounts receivable, vendor accounts payable and other assets and liabilities. We procure finished goods inventory from our contract manufacturers and typically pay them within 30-60 days. We extend credit to our channel partners and typically collect in 30 to 60 days, although these time periods can vary and can be longer.

          Cash provided by operating activities is generated by net income (loss) adjusted for certain non-cash items and changes in assets and liabilities. Cash provided by operating activities was $7.4 million for 2009 as compared to cash provided by operations of $8.2 million for 2008 and $7.9 million for 2007. The decline in cash provided by operations in fiscal year 2009 compared to fiscal year 2008 resulted primarily from our net loss of $11.8 million, offset by noncash adjustments. Noncash adjustments were higher in 2009 compared to 2008, including stock-based compensation expense, which was higher in 2009 by $2.0 million. Noncash adjustments included $8.9 in stock-based compensation, $1.1 million in provision for doubtful accounts, $0.2 million loss on disposal of property and equipment and $2.0 million in depreciation expense. These were partially offset by $0.2 million in excess tax benefits from stock options exercised. In addition, the period-to-period change in cash flows relating to operating activities is composed of increases in deferred revenue of $3.8 million, primarily due to the deferral of revenue from sales of post contractual support contracts exceeding the revenue recognized from post contractual support contracts, and increases in accrued liabilities and other of $2.3 million and in accounts payable of $1.8 million, decreases in prepaid expenses and other current assets of $0.5 million, and inventory of $0.2 million. These sources of cash were partially offset by uses of cash associated with an increase in accounts receivable of $0.6 million due to increased sales in 2009 compared to 2008.

          Net cash provided by operating activities in 2008 partly consisted of net income of $2.6 million. Noncash adjustments were higher in 2008 compared to 2007, including stock-based compensation expense, which was higher in 2008 by $4.3 million. This was partially offset by a higher deferred tax benefit of $1.7 million in 2008. In addition, the period-to-period change in cash flows relating to operating activities was also affected by an increase in deferred revenue of $4.7 million, primarily due to the deferral of revenue from sales of post contractual support contracts exceeding the revenue recognized from post contractual support contracts, and an increase in accrued liabilities and other of $2.3 million, accrued employee compensation of $1.8 million, primarily attributable to increased headcount. These sources of cash were partially offset by uses of cash associated with an increase in accounts receivable of $2.7 million due to increased sales in 2008 compared to 2007, an increase in inventories of $5.0 million primarily due to business growth and an increase in other assets of $1.9 million.

          Net cash provided by operating activities in 2007 primarily consisted of net income of $6.1 million, stock-based compensation expense of $2.7 million, depreciation and amortization expense of $1.0 million, increase in fair value of the preferred stock warrants by $0.5 million. This was partially off-set by a decrease of $2.4 million related to net changes in assets and liabilities. Of this $2.4 million decrease, the primary sources of cash out-flow were increases to accounts receivable of $8.2 million, inventories of $2.4 million and prepaid and other current assets of $2.5 million which was partially off-set by increased deferred revenue relating to support contracts of $7.4 million and increased accounts payable of $2.0 million.

     Cash flows from investing activities

          We have classified our investment portfolio as “available for sale” and our investments are made with a policy of capital preservation and liquidity as the primary objectives. We may hold investments to maturity; however, we may sell an investment at any time if the quality rating of the investment declines, the yield on the investment is no longer attractive or we are in need of cash. Because we invest only in investment securities that are highly liquid with a ready market, we believe that the purchase, maturity or sale of our investments has no material impact to our overall liquidity.

          Net cash used in investing activities was $5.5 million, $36.5 million, and $2.2 million in 2009, 2008 and 2007, respectively. Net cash used in investing activities in 2009 was primarily related to $4.1 million used to purchase technology licenses and patents and $1.8 million used to purchase property and equipment. This was partially offset by sale/maturities of investments made in U.S. government sponsored securities and corporate bonds and commercial paper. Net cash used in investing activities in 2008 was primarily related to investments made in U.S. government sponsored securities and corporate bonds and commercial paper and in 2007 was primarily for capital expenditures related to manufacturing tooling for the production of our hardware products, computer equipment for our research and development lab and to support our growth in headcount. Our requirements for additional capital expenditures are subject to change depending upon several factors, including our needs based on our changing business and industry and market conditions.

     Cash flows from financing activities

          Net cash provided by (used in) financing activities was $3.2 million, $79.7 million and $(0.7) million, in 2009, 2008 and 2007, respectively. In 2009, we generated proceeds of $3.0 million from the sale of employee stock purchase plan shares and the exercise of common stock options and $0.2 million from tax benefit of stock options exercised. In 2008, we generated proceeds of $78.6 million from our initial public offering including payment of other offering costs, $0.9 million from exercise of common stock options and

34


received tax benefit of stock options exercised of $0.3 million. In 2007, we incurred $1.3 million of costs related to our initial public offering and generated $0.6 million of net proceeds from the exercise of common stock options.

Contractual Obligations

          The following is a summary of our contractual obligations as of June 30, 2009:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Payments Due by Period

 

 

 


 

 

 

Total

 

Less Than
1 Year

 

1-3 Years

 

3-5 Years

 

Thereafter

 

 

 

(In thousands)

 

Operating lease obligations (1)

 

$

6,390

 

$

1,151

 

$

2,678

 

$

2,281

 

$

280

 

Non-cancellable purchase commitments for finished goods

 

 

16,161

 

 

16,161

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Purchase commitments for software license use

 

 

5,049

 

 

2,355

 

 

2,194

 

 

500

 

 

 

 

 



 



 



 



 



 

Total

 

$

27,600

 

$

19,667

 

$

4,872

 

$

2,781

 

$

280

 

 

 



 



 



 



 



 

          (1) On July 16, 2009, the Company entered into an amendment of the lease for its corporate headquarters. The existing lease was scheduled to expire on October 31, 2009 and the amendment extends the term of the existing lease to September 30, 2014. The Company has included incremental obligation of $4.8 million to the total lease commitment arising from the amendment as a component of the operating lease obligations in the contractual obligations summary above.

          (2) Effective July 1, 2007, we adopted the provisions of FASB Interpretation No. 48, Accounting for Uncertainty in Income Taxes — an interpretation of FASB Statement No. 109 , (“FIN 48”). As of June 30, 2009, the Company’s total amount of unrecognized tax benefit was approximately $1.5 million of which none, if recognized, would impact the effective tax rate as the Company has a valuation allowance on its carryforward attributes. The Company does not expect its unrecognized tax benefits to change materially over the next 12 months.

Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements

          We do not have any material off-balance sheet arrangements (Other than those disclosed above within “Contractual Obligations”) nor do we have any relationships with unconsolidated entities or financial partnerships, such as entities often referred to as structured finance or special purpose entities, which are established for the purpose of facilitating off-balance sheet arrangements or other contractually narrow or limited purposes.

Critical Accounting Policies and Estimates

          Our consolidated financial statements are prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America, or GAAP. These accounting principles require us to make certain estimates and judgments that can affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities as of the dates of the consolidated financial statements, the disclosure of contingencies as of the dates of the consolidated financial statements, and the reported amounts of revenue and expenses during the periods presented. Although we believe that our judgments and estimates are reasonable under the circumstances, actual results may differ from those estimates.

          We believe the following to be our critical accounting policies because they are important to the portrayal of our financial condition and results of operations and they require critical management judgments and estimates about matters that are uncertain:

 

 

 

 

Revenue recognition;

 

 

 

 

Allowance for doubtful accounts;

 

 

 

 

Stock-based compensation;

 

 

 

 

Inventory valuation; and

 

 

 

 

Accounting for income taxes.

          If actual results or events differ materially from those contemplated by us in making these estimates, our reported financial condition and results of operations for future periods could be materially affected. See “Risk Factors” for certain matters that may affect our future financial condition or results of operations.

35


     Revenue Recognition

           Product Revenue . Our software is integrated with our hardware and is essential to the functionality of the integrated system product. Product sales typically include a perpetual license to our software, except in limited circumstances such as sales of spare or replacement handsets, back-up switches and additional business applications. We recognize revenue for these sales in accordance with Statement of Position (SOP) No. 97-2, Software Revenue Recognition , or Staff Accounting Bulletin (SAB) No. 104, Revenue Recognition in Financial Statements , as applicable, depending on whether the hardware is sold in a multiple-element arrangement with software and post-contractual support or on a standalone basis if the enterprise customer purchases hardware, software, or maintenance support separately. For the initial sale, we generally bundle together the hardware, software, and post-contractual support contracts with terms of up to five years. Thereafter, if the enterprise customer increases the number of end user deployments and/or functionality, it may add more hardware, software, and related post-contractual support by purchasing them separately. We evaluate existence of vendor-specific objective evidence, or VSOE, of fair value for post-contractual support and, installation and services and training, as noted below.

          We recognize product revenue when persuasive evidence of an arrangement exists, product has shipped or delivery has occurred (depending on when title passes), the sales price is fixed or determinable and free of contingencies and significant uncertainties, and collection is probable. Our fee is considered fixed or determinable at the execution of an agreement, based on specific products and quantities to be delivered at specified prices. Our agreements generally do not include rights of return or acceptance provisions. To the extent that the Company’s agreements contain acceptance terms, the Company recognizes revenue upon product acceptance, unless the acceptance provision is deemed to be perfunctory. We maintain a reserve for sales returns based on historical experience. Payment terms generally range from net 30 to net 60 days. In the event payment terms are extended materially from our standard business practices, the fees are deemed to not be fixed or determinable and revenue is recognized when the payments become due. We assess the ability to collect from channel partners based on a number of factors, including creditworthiness and past transaction history. If the channel partner is not deemed creditworthy, we defer all revenue from the arrangement until payment is received and all other revenue recognition criteria have been met. Shipping charges are included in product revenue and the related shipping costs are included in cost of product revenue.

          We monitor and analyze the accuracy of sales returns estimates by reviewing actual returns and adjust it for future expectations to determine the adequacy of our current and future reserve needs. If actual future returns and allowances differ from past experience and expectation, additional allowances may be required.

          We have arrangements with channel partners to reimburse the channel partners for cooperative marketing costs meeting specified criteria. The reimbursements are limited to 50% of the actual costs charged to the channel partners by third-party vendors for advertising, trade shows and other related sales and marketing activities for which we receive an identifiable benefit, subject to a limit of the total cooperative marketing allowance earned by each channel partner. In accordance with EITF Issue No. 01-9, Accounting for Consideration Given by a Vendor to a Customer (including a Reseller of the Vendor’s Products) , we record the reimbursements to the channel partners meeting such specified criteria within sales and marketing expenses in the accompanying consolidated statements of operations.

           Post-Contractual Support. Our support and services revenue is primarily derived from post-contractual support. We account for post-contractual support revenue based on SOP 97-2, which states that if an arrangement includes multiple elements, the fee should be allocated to the various elements based on VSOE of fair value, regardless of any separate prices stated within the contract for each element. VSOE of fair value is limited to the price charged when the same element is sold separately. VSOE of fair value is established for support through prior renewals of post-contractual support contracts, which establishes a price which is based on a standalone sale. To determine the fair value of the price charged, we analyze both the selling prices when elements are sold separately as well as the concentrations of those prices. We believe those concentrations have been sufficient to enable us to establish VSOE of fair value for the post-contract support revenues.

          We use the residual method, as allowed by SOP No. 98-9, Modification of SOP 97-2 , Software Revenue Recognition With Respect to Certain Transactions , to determine the amount of product revenue to be recognized. Under the residual method, the fair value of the undelivered elements, such as post-contractual support, installation services and training, are deferred and the remaining portion of the sales amount is recognized as product revenue. The fair value of the post-contractual support is recognized as support and services revenue on a straight-line basis over the term of the related support period, which can be up to five years in length.

           Installation and training. Installation services are sold on an elective basis. Channel partners or enterprise customers generally perform installations without our involvement, so we do not recognize substantial revenue from installation services. As installation is typically performed by the channel partner or enterprise customer, it is not considered essential to the functionality of the delivered elements. Installation is generally priced at established rates based on estimated hours to install our systems. Training services are also sold on an elective basis, both to channel partners and to enterprise customers, and is purchased both with system orders and on a standalone basis. VSOE of fair value has been established for training. We recognize revenue related to installation services and training upon delivery of the service.

36


          If VSOE of fair value does not exist for installation, training or commitments to provide specified upgrades, services or additional products to customers in the future, as has been the case from time to time in the past, we defer all revenue from the arrangement until the earlier of the point at which VSOE of fair value does exist or all such elements from the arrangement have been delivered.

     Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

          We review our allowance for doubtful accounts on a quarterly basis by assessing individual accounts receivable that materially exceed due dates. Risk assessment for these accounts includes historical collections experience with the specific account and with our similarly situated accounts coupled with other related credit factors that may evidence a risk of default and loss to us. Accordingly, the amount of this allowance will fluctuate based upon changes in revenue levels, collection of specific balances in accounts receivable and estimated changes in channel partner credit quality or likelihood of collection. If the financial condition of our channel partners were to deteriorate, resulting in an impairment of their ability to make payments, additional allowances may be required. The allowance for doubtful accounts represents management’s best estimate, but changes in circumstances, including unforeseen declines in market conditions and collection rates, may result in additional allowances in the future or reductions in allowances due to future recoveries.

     Stock-Based Compensation

          Prior to July 1, 2006, we accounted for employee stock options using the intrinsic value method in accordance with Accounting Principles Board Opinion No. 25, Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees , or APB 25, and Financial Accounting Standards Board Interpretation No. (FIN) 44, Accounting for Certain Transactions Involving Stock Compensation, an Interpretation of APB No. 25 , and had adopted the disclosure only provisions of Statement of Financial Accounting Standards, or SFAS No. 123, Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation , or SFAS 123, and SFAS No. 148, Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation — Transition and Disclosure , or SFAS 148.

          In accordance with APB 25, stock-based compensation expense, which is a non-cash charge, resulted from stock option grants at exercise prices that, for financial reporting purposes, were deemed to be below the estimated fair value of the underlying common stock on the date of grant. Effective July 1, 2006, we adopted the fair value recognition provisions of SFAS No. 123 (revised 2004), Share-Based Payment , or SFAS 123(R), using the prospective transition method, which requires us to apply the provisions of SFAS 123(R) only to awards newly granted, modified, repurchased or cancelled, after the adoption date. Under this transition method, our stock-based compensation expense recognized beginning July 1, 2006 is based on the grant date fair value of stock option awards we grant or modify after July 1, 2006. Prior to and during fiscal year 2007, we categorized our options into two classes. Class One includes all options granted with standard four-year vesting and no ability to exercise prior to vesting. Class Two includes options granted with standard four-year vesting but allow for early exercisability. We discontinued granting Class Two options as of June 30, 2007. We recognize stock-based compensation expense for both Class One and Class Two on a straight-line basis over the options’ expected vesting terms, generally four years. We estimated the grant date fair value of stock option awards under the provisions of SFAS 123(R) using the Black-Scholes option valuation model with the following assumptions:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year Ended

 


 

 

 

 

 

June 30, 2007

 

 

 

 

 

 


 

 

June 30, 2009

 

June 30, 2008

 

Class One

 

Class Two

 


 


 


 


Expected life from grant date of option

 

4.58-6.46 years

 

6.08 years

 

6.08 years

 

4.0 years

Risk-free interest rate

 

1.76-3.11%

 

2.42-4.50%

 

4.6-4.8%

 

4.6-4.8%

Expected volatility

 

58-59%

 

62%

 

71%

 

55%

Expected dividend yield

 

0%

 

0%

 

0%

 

0%


          We estimated the grant date fair value of stock purchase rights granted for ESPP under the provisions of SFAS 123(R) using the Black-Scholes option valuation model with the following assumptions:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year Ended

 

 


 

 

June 30, 2009

 

June 30, 2008

 

June 30, 2007

 

 


 


 


Expected life from grant date of ESPP

 

0.50 years

 

0.50 years

 

Risk-free interest rate

 

0.31-1.81%

 

2.03-2.49%

 

Expected volatility

 

92-138%

 

47-136%

 

Expected dividend yield

 

0%

 

0%

 

          During 2009, we recorded non-cash stock-based compensation expense of $8.9 million under SFAS 123(R). In future periods, stock-based compensation expense may increase as we issue additional equity-based awards to continue to attract and retain key employees. Additionally, SFAS 123(R) requires that we recognize compensation expense only for the portion of stock options that are

37


expected to vest, assuming an expected forfeiture rate in determining stock-based compensation expense, which could affect the stock-based compensation expense recorded if there is a significant difference between actual and estimated forfeiture rates. Our estimated forfeiture rate in the year ended June 30, 2009 was 11.6%. At June 30, 2009, total unrecognized compensation cost related to stock-based awards granted to employees and non-employee directors was $24.0 million, net of estimated forfeitures of $7.5 million. This cost will be amortized on a straight-line basis over a weighted-average period of approximately three years.

     Inventory Valuation

          Inventories consist principally of finished goods and are stated at the lower of cost or market value, with cost being determined under a standard cost method that approximates first-in, first out. A small portion of our inventory also relates to evaluation units located at enterprise customer locations and service inventory. Inventory valuation reserves are established to reduce the carrying amounts of our inventories to their net estimated realizable values. Inventory valuation reserves are based on historical usage, expected demand and, with respect to evaluation units, conversion rate and age. Inherent in our estimates of market value in determining inventory valuation reserves are estimates related to economic trends, future demand for our products and technological obsolescence of our products. If future demand or market conditions are less favorable than our projections, additional inventory valuation reserves could be required and would be reflected in cost of product revenue in the period in which the reserves are taken. Inventory valuation reserves were $0.6 million and $0.3 million as of June 30, 2009 and 2008, respectively. Once a reserve is established, it is maintained until the unit to which it relates is sold or scrapped.

     Accounting for Income Taxes

          The Company accounts for income taxes using the asset and liability method as prescribed by Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (SFAS) No. 109, Accounting for Income Taxes. Deferred income taxes are recognized by applying enacted statutory tax rates applicable to future years to differences between the financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets and liabilities and their respective tax bases and operating loss and tax credit carryforwards. The effect on deferred tax assets and liabilities of a change in tax rates is recognized in income in the period that includes the enactment date. The measurement of deferred tax assets is reduced, if necessary, by a valuation allowance for any tax benefit of which future realization is uncertain.

          The total valuation allowance increased by approximately $6.2 million in 2009 and was primarily related to the increase in the R&D credit and stock-based compensation and other timing differences. In assessing the realizability of deferred tax assets, management considers whether it is more likely than not that some portion or all of deferred tax assets will not be realized. The realization of deferred tax assets is based on several factors, including the Company’s past earnings and the scheduling of deferred taxes and projected income from operating activities. As of June 30, 2009, management does not believe it is more likely than not that $11.6 million of the $13.3 million net deferred tax assets relating to U.S. federal and state operations are realizable. The Company intends to maintain the valuation allowance until sufficient positive evidence exists to support reversal of some or all of the valuation allowance. In addition, the occurrence of negative evidence with respect to deferred tax assets which currently have no valuation allowance could result in an increase in the valuation allowance in the future period. The Company’s income tax expense (benefit) recorded in the future will be reduced or increased in the event changes to the valuation allowance are required.

Recent Accounting Pronouncements

          Refer to Note 1 of Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements in this Form 10-K for a discussion of the expected impact of recently issued accounting pronouncements.

 

 

I TEM 7A.

QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK

Market Risk

          We are exposed to various market risks, including changes in foreign currency exchange rates. Market risk is the potential loss arising from adverse changes in market rates and prices, such as foreign currency exchange and interest rates. We do not enter into derivatives or other financial instruments for trading or speculative purposes. We may enter into financial instrument contracts with major financial institutions to manage and reduce the impact of changes in foreign currency exchange rates in the future. We had no forward exchange contracts outstanding as of June 30, 2009.

          In addition, we currently hold our investment portfolio in accounts with three financial firms. While we do not invest our cash in obligations of these firms, if these firms were to experience financial or other regulatory difficulties, it might be difficult for us to access our investments in a timely manner. In 2008, we held our investment portfolios with two financial firms. In an effort to minimize risks of holding our investment portfolio with two financial firms, we moved a portion of our investment portfolio to a third financial firm, in 2009.

38


Interest Rate Risk

          We maintain an investment portfolio of various holdings, types, and maturities. These securities are generally classified as available for sale and consequently, are recorded on the balance sheet at fair value with unrealized gains and losses reported as a separate component of accumulated other comprehensive income (loss). At any time, a sharp rise in interest rates could have a material adverse impact on the fair value of our investment portfolio. Conversely, declines in interest rates could have a material positive impact on interest earnings for our portfolio. We do not currently hedge these interest rate exposures.

          The following table presents the hypothetical change in fair values in the financial instruments we held at June 30, 2009 that are sensitive to changes in interest rates. The modeling technique used measures the change in fair values arising from selected potential changes in interest rates on our investment portfolio, which had a fair value of $33.8 million at June 30, 2009. Market changes reflect immediate hypothetical parallel shifts in the yield curve of plus or minus 100, 50 and 25 basis points (BPS).

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Decrease in interest rates

 

Increase in interest rates

 

 

 


 


 

(in thousands)

 

-100 BPS

 

-50 BPS

 

-25 BPS

 

25 BPS

 

50 BPS

 

100 BPS

 

Total Fair Market Value

 

$

34,314

 

$

34,080

 

$

33,964

 

$

33,731

 

$

33,614

 

$

33,381

 

Percent Change in Fair Value

 

 

1.38

%

 

0.69

%

 

0.34

%

 

(0.34

)%

 

(0.69

)%

 

(1.38

)%

39


 

 

ITEM 8.

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTARY DATA

SHORETEL, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

INDEX TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

 

 

 

Page

 

 


 

 

 

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

 

41

Consolidated Balance Sheets

 

42

Consolidated Statements of Operations

 

43

Consolidated Statements of Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock and Stockholders’ Equity and Comprehensive Income (Loss)

 

44

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows

 

45

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 

46

40


REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

To the Board of Directors and Stockholders of
ShoreTel, Inc.
Sunnyvale, California

          We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of ShoreTel, Inc. and subsidiaries (collectively, the “Company”) as of June 30, 2009 and 2008, and the related consolidated statements of operations, redeemable convertible preferred stock and stockholders’ equity and comprehensive income (loss), and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended June 30, 2009. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements based on our audits.

          We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

          In our opinion, such consolidated financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of ShoreTel, Inc. and subsidiaries as of June 30, 2009 and 2008, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended June 30, 2009, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.

          As discussed in Note 1 to the consolidated financial statements, on July 1, 2007 the Company adopted the provisions of Financial Accounting Standards Board Interpretation No. 48, Accounting for Uncertainty in Income Taxes — an interpretation of FASB Statement No. 109.

          We have also audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of June 30, 2009, based on the criteria established in Internal Control — Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission and our report dated September 10, 2009, expressed an unqualified opinion on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting.

/s/    DELOITTE & TOUCHE LLP

San Jose, California
September 10, 2009

41


SHORETEL, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS

(Amounts in thousands except per share amounts)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

June 30,

 

 

 


 

 

 

2009

 

2008

 

 

 


 


 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ASSETS

CURRENT ASSETS:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash and cash equivalents

 

$

73,819

 

$

68,672

 

Short-term investments

 

 

33,847

 

 

34,139

 

Accounts receivable, net of allowances of $1,330 and $414 as of June 30, 2009 and June 30, 2008, respectively

 

 

21,454

 

 

21,909

 

Inventories

 

 

11,805

 

 

12,008

 

Prepaid expenses and other current assets

 

 

3,110

 

 

5,063

 

 

 



 



 

Total current assets

 

 

144,035

 

 

141,791

 

PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT — Net

 

 

3,475

 

 

3,649

 

OTHER ASSETS

 

 

8,114

 

 

2,357

 

 

 



 



 

TOTAL

 

$

155,624

 

$

147,797

 

 

 



 



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CURRENT LIABILITIES:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Accounts payable

 

$

7,774

 

$

5,952

 

Accrued liabilities and other

 

 

4,494

 

 

4,420

 

Accrued employee compensation

 

 

4,895

 

 

5,547

 

Deferred revenue

 

 

15,255

 

 

13,879

 

 

 



 



 

Total current liabilities

 

 

32,418

 

 

29,798

 

LONG-TERM LIABILITIES:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Long-term deferred revenue

 

 

7,236

 

 

4,786

 

Other long-term liabilities

 

 

2,198

 

 

 

 

 



 



 

Total liabilities

 

 

41,852

 

 

34,584

 

 

 



 



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES (Note 12)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Preferred stock, par value $.001 per share, authorized 5,000 shares; none issued and outstanding

 

 

 

 

 

Common stock and additional paid-in capital, par value $.001 per share, authorized 500,000; issued and outstanding, 44,362 and 43,341 shares as of June 30, 2009 and June 30, 2008, respectively

 

 

207,651

 

 

195,596

 

Deferred compensation

 

 

(54

)

 

(142

)

Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss)

 

 

136

 

 

(76

)

Accumulated deficit

 

 

(93,961

)

 

(82,165

)

 

 



 



 

Total stockholders’ equity

 

 

113,772

 

 

113,213

 

 

 



 



 

TOTAL

 

$

155,624

 

$

147,797

 

 

 



 



 

See notes to consolidated financial statements

42


SHORETEL, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year Ended June 30,

 

 

 


 

 

 

2009

 

2008

 

2007

 

 

 


 


 


 

 

 

(Amounts in thousands, except per share amounts)

 

REVENUE:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Product

 

$

109,555

 

$

110,496

 

$

87,095

 

Support and services

 

 

25,267

 

 

18,233

 

 

10,732

 

 

 



 



 



 

Total revenue

 

 

134,822

 

 

128,729

 

 

97,827

 

COST OF REVENUE:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Product

 

 

38,142

 

 

37,451

 

 

29,751

 

Support and services

 

 

10,965

 

 

9,994

 

 

6,837

 

 

 



 



 



 

Total cost of revenue

 

 

49,107

 

 

47,445

 

 

36,588

 

GROSS PROFIT

 

 

85,715

 

 

81,284

 

 

61,239

 

OPERATING EXPENSES:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Research and development

 

 

30,587

 

 

26,691

 

 

17,224

 

Sales and marketing

 

 

44,306

 

 

37,780

 

 

26,126

 

General and administrative

 

 

19,306

 

 

17,420

 

 

11,673

 

Litigation settlement

 

 

4,110

 

 

 

 

 

 

 



 



 



 

Total operating expenses

 

 

98,309

 

 

81,891

 

 

55,023

 

 

 



 



 



 

INCOME (LOSS) FROM OPERATIONS

 

 

(12,594

)

 

(607

)

 

6,216

 

OTHER INCOME (EXPENSE):

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Interest income

 

 

1,399

 

 

4,141

 

 

803

 

Change in fair value of warrants

 

 

 

 

 

 

(508

)

Other

 

 

(258

)

 

(40

)

 

(22

)

 

 



 



 



 

Total other income

 

 

1,141

 

 

4,101

 

 

273

 

 

 



 



 



 

INCOME (LOSS) BEFORE PROVISION FOR INCOME TAXES

 

 

(11,453

)

 

3,494

 

 

6,489

 

PROVISION FOR INCOME TAXES

 

 

(343

)

 

(861

)

 

(408

)

 

 



 



 



 

NET INCOME (LOSS)

 

 

(11,796

)

 

2,633

 

 

6,081

 

ACCRETION OF PREFERRED STOCK

 

 

 

 

 

 

(50

)

 

 



 



 



 

NET INCOME (LOSS) AVAILABLE TO COMMON STOCKHOLDERS

 

$

(11,796

)

$

2,633

 

$

6,031

 

 

 



 



 



 

Net income per common share available to common stockholders:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Basic

 

$

(0.27

)

$

0.06

 

$

0.70

 

 

 



 



 



 

Diluted

 

$

(0.27

)

$

0.06

 

$

0.17

 

 

 



 



 



 

Weighted average shares used in computing net income (loss) per share available to common stockholders:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Basic

 

 

43,714

 

 

42,413

 

 

8,565

 

Diluted

 

 

43,714

 

 

44,861

 

 

35,581

 

See notes to consolidated financial statements

43


SHORETEL, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF REDEEMABLE CONVERTIBLE
PREFERRED STOCK AND STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY AND COMPREHENSIVE INCOME (LOSS)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Redeemable Convertible
Preferred Stock

 

 

 

Common Stock and
Additional Paid-In-Capital

 

Deferred
Stock
Compensation

 

Note
Receivable
from
Stockholders

 

Accumulated
Other
Comprehensive
Income (Loss)

 

Accumulated
Deficit

 

Total
Stockholders’
Equity

 

 

 


 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Shares

 

Amount

 

 

 

Shares

 

Amount

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


 


 

 

 

 


 


 


 


 


 


 

 

 

 

         

 

 
(Amounts in thousands)

 

BALANCE — July 1, 2006

 

 

23,316

 

$

56,332

 

 

 

 

9,289

 

$

50,277

 

$

(335

)

$

(231

)

$

 

$

(90,879

)

$

(41,168

)

Accretion of preferred stock

 

 

 

 

 

50

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(50

)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(50

)

Exercise of common stock options

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

901

 

 

573

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

573

 

Stock-based compensation expense

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2,588

 

 

98

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2,686

 

Repayment of note receivable from shareholder

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

12

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

12

 

Vesting of accrued early exercised stock options

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

228

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

228

 

Warrants reclassified to liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

(41

)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Surrender of common stock for settlement of notes receivable (Note 4)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(58

)

 

(410

)

 

 

 

 

219

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(191

)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net income and comprehensive income

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

6,081

 

 

6,081

 

 

 



 



 

 

 

 



 



 



 



 



 



 

BALANCE — June 30, 2007

 

 

23,316

 

 

56,341

 

 

 

 

10,132

 

 

53,206

 

 

(237

)

 

 

 

 

 

(84,798

)

 

(31,829

)

Proceeds from initial public offering, net of offering costs

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

9,085

 

 

77,328

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

77,328

 

Preferred stock warrants converted to common stock warrants

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

549

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

549

 

Conversion of preferred stock to common stock

 

 

(23,316

)

 

(56,341

)

 

 

 

23,316

 

 

56,341

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

56,341

 

Exercise of warrants

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

61

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Common stock issued under stock-based compensation plans

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

747

 

 

857

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

857

 

Stock-based compensation expense

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

6,845

 

 

95

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

6,940

 

Vesting of accrued early exercised stock options

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

220

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

220

 

Income tax benefit related to stock option exercises

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

250

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

250

 

Components of comprehensive income:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Unrealized loss on short-term investments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(76

)

 

 

 

 

(76

)

Net income

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2,633

 

 

2,633

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 



 

Comprehensive income

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2,557

 

 

 



 



 

 

 

 



 



 



 



 



 



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

BALANCE — June 30, 2008

 

 

 

$

 

 

 

 

43,341

 

$

195,596

 

$

(142

)

$

 

$

(76

)

$

(82,165

)

$

113,213

 

Common stock issued under stock-based compensation plans

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1,021

 

 

3,004

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3,004

 

Stock-based compensation expense

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

8,807

 

 

88

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

8,895

 

Vesting of accrued early exercised stock options

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

54

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

54

 

Income tax benefit related to stock option exercises

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

190

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

190

 

Components of comprehensive income:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Unrealized gain on short-term investments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

212

 

 

 

 

 

212

 

Net loss

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(11,796

)

 

(11,796

)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 



 

Comprehensive loss

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(11,584

)

 

 



 



 

 

 

 



 



 



 



 



 



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

BALANCE — June 30, 2009

 

 

 

$

 

 

 

 

44,362

 

$

207,651

 

$

(54

)

$

 

$

136

 

$

(93,961

)

 

113,772

 

 

 



 



 

 

 

 



 



 



 



 



 



 

See notes to consolidated financial statements

44


SHORETEL, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year Ended June 30,

 

 

 


 

 

 

2009

 

2008

 

2007

 

 

 


 


 


 

 

 

(In thousands)

 

CASH FLOWS FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net income (loss)

 

$

(11,796

)

$

2,633

 

$

6,081

 

Adjustments to reconcile net income (loss) to net cash provided by operating activities:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Depreciation and amortization

 

 

1,965

 

 

1,606

 

 

956

 

Amortization/Accretion of premium/discount on investments

 

 

27

 

 

(198

)

 

 

Stock compensation expense

 

 

8,895

 

 

6,940

 

 

2,686

 

Excess tax benefit from stock options exercised

 

 

(190

)

 

(250

)

 

 

Loss on disposal of property and equipment

 

 

191

 

 

270

 

 

38

 

Increase in fair value of warrants

 

 

 

 

 

 

508

 

Deferred tax benefit

 

 

 

 

(1,748

)

 

 

Recovery from settlement of note receivable

 

 

 

 

 

 

(191

)

Provision for doubtful accounts receivable

 

 

1,066

 

 

245

 

 

238

 

Changes in assets and liabilities:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Accounts receivable

 

 

(611

)

 

(2,743

)

 

(8,170

)

Inventories

 

 

203

 

 

(4,951

)

 

(2,401

)

Prepaid expenses and other current assets

 

 

480

 

 

57

 

 

(2,520

)

Other assets

 

 

(85

)

 

(1,880

)

 

(55

)

Accounts payable

 

 

1,796

 

 

(586

)

 

2,034

 

Accrued liabilities and other

 

 

2,332

 

 

2,283

 

 

463

 

Accrued employee compensation

 

 

(652

)

 

1,761

 

 

864

 

Deferred revenue

 

 

3,826

 

 

4,714

 

 

7,379

 

 

 



 



 



 

Net cash provided by operating activities

 

 

7,447

 

 

8,153

 

 

7,910

 

 

 



 



 



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CASH FLOWS FROM INVESTING ACTIVITIES:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Purchases of property and equipment

 

 

(1,842

)

 

(2,407

)

 

(2,106

)

Purchase of investments

 

 

(35,087

)

 

(51,267

)

 

 

Proceeds from sale/maturities of investments

 

 

35,558

 

 

17,250

 

 

 

Purchase of software licenses and others

 

 

(4,123

)

 

 

 

 

Long-term deposit on operating facility

 

 

 

 

(95

)

 

(118

)

 

 



 



 



 

Net cash used in investing activities

 

 

(5,494

)

 

(36,519

)

 

(2,224

)

 

 



 



 



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CASH FLOWS FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Proceeds from initial public offering, received net of underwriting discounts

 

 

 

 

80,265

 

 

 

Initial public offering costs

 

 

 

 

(1,660

)

 

(1,277

)

Repayment of capital leases

 

 

 

 

 

 

(1

)

Proceeds from issuance of common stock

 

 

3,004

 

 

857

 

 

573

 

Repayment of shareholder notes issued in connection with stock option exercises

 

 

 

 

 

 

12

 

Excess tax benefit from stock options exercised

 

 

190

 

 

250

 

 

 

 

 



 



 



 

Net cash provided by (used in) financing activities

 

 

3,194

 

 

79,712

 

 

(693

)

 

 



 



 



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

NET INCREASE IN CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS

 

 

5,147

 

 

51,346

 

 

4,993

 

CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS — Beginning of the year

 

 

68,672

 

 

17,326

 

 

12,333

 

 

 



 



 



 

CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS — End of the year

 

$

73,819

 

$

68,672

 

$

17,326

 

 

 



 



 



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

SUPPLEMENTAL DISCLOSURES OF CASH FLOW INFORMATION:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash paid during the period for income taxes

 

$

1,196

 

$

1,398

 

$

697

 

 

NONCASH FINANCING AND INVESTING ACTIVITIES:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Conversion of redeemable convertible preferred stock to common stock

 

$

 

$

56,341

 

$

 

Reclassification of initial public offering costs from other assets to common stock

 

$

 

$

2,752

 

$

 

Reclassification of preferred stock warrant liability to common stock

 

$

 

$

549

 

$

 

Accretion of preferred stock

 

$

 

$

 

$

50

 

Surrender of common stock for settlement of notes receivable

 

$

 

$

 

$

536

 

Unpaid portion of property and equipment purchases included in period-end accounts payable

 

$

196

 

$

185

 

$

265

 

Deferred initial public offering costs included in period-end accounts payable and accrued liabilities

 

$

 

$

 

$

1,476

 

Warrants reclassified to liabilities

 

$

 

$

 

$

41

 

Vesting of accrued early exercised stock options

 

$

54

 

$

220

 

$

228

 

Unpaid portion of purchases of other assets included in period-end accounts payable and accrued liabilities

 

$

215

 

$

200

 

$

 

See notes to consolidated financial statements

45


SHORETEL, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

1. THE COMPANY AND SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES

          The Company — ShoreTel, Inc. was incorporated in California on September 17, 1996 and reincorporated in Delaware on June 22, 2007. ShoreTel, Inc. and its subsidiaries (collectively, the “Company”) provide enterprise internet protocol (“IP”) telecommunications systems. The Company sells systems that generally include hardware, software licenses, post-contractual customer support and, in some cases, additional elements, such as training, installation and other professional services.

          In July 2007, the Company completed an initial public offering, or IPO, of common stock in which it sold and issued 9,085,000 shares of common stock, including 1,185,000 shares sold by the Company pursuant to the underwriters’ exercise of their over-allotment, at an issue price of $9.50 per share. The Company raised a total of $86.3 million in gross proceeds from the IPO, or approximately $77.4 million in net proceeds after deducting underwriting discounts of $6.0 million and other offering costs of $2.9 million. Upon closing of the IPO, all shares of redeemable convertible preferred stock outstanding automatically converted into 23,316,406 shares of common stock. In addition, all outstanding warrants to purchase shares of the Company’s redeemable convertible preferred stock were converted into warrants to purchase an aggregate of 67,703 shares of common stock.

          Fiscal Year End — The Company operates on a fiscal year ending June 30.

          Subsequent Event — The Company has evaluated events and transactions subsequent to June 30, 2009 through September 10, 2009, the date of issuance of Consolidated Financial Statements. During the period from July 1, 2009 to September 10, 2009, the Company did not have any material subsequent events.

          Consolidation — The accompanying consolidated financial statements include the accounts of the Company’s wholly owned subsidiaries located in Germany, the United Kingdom and Australia. All transactions and balances between the parent and the subsidiaries have been eliminated in consolidation. The functional currency of the subsidiaries is the U.S. dollar. Functional currency monetary assets and liabilities are translated at the rates of exchange on the balance sheet date, and local currency revenues and expenses are translated at average rates of exchange during the period. Gains and losses resulting from the process of remeasuring foreign currency financial statements into U.S. dollars are included in other income (expenses), net.

          Use of Estimates — The preparation of financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements and reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. The use of estimates are included in certain areas including revenue recognition, allowance for doubtful accounts, stock-based compensation, inventory and other assets valuation, and accounting for income taxes. Actual results could differ from those estimates.

          Certain Significant Risks and Uncertainties — The Company participates in a dynamic high-technology industry. Changes in any of the following areas could have a material adverse effect on the Company’s future financial position, results of operations, or cash flows: reliance on sole-source suppliers; general economic conditions; advances and trends in new technologies; competitive pressures; changes in the overall demand for its future products; acceptance of the Company’s products; litigation or claims against the Company based on intellectual property, patent, regulatory, or other factors; and the Company’s ability to attract and retain employees necessary to support its growth.

          Concentration of Credit Risk — Financial instruments, which potentially subject the Company to concentrations of credit risk, consist principally of cash and cash equivalent, short-term investments and accounts receivable. As of June 30, 2009, substantially all of the Company’s cash and cash equivalents and short-term investments were managed by multiple financial institutions. Accounts receivable are typically unsecured and are derived from revenue earned from the customers. The Company performs ongoing credit evaluations of its customers and maintains allowances for potential credit losses. At June 30, 2009 and 2008, no enterprise customer or channel partner comprised more than 10% of total accounts receivable.

          Fair Value of Financial Instruments The carrying amounts of the Company’s financial instruments, including cash and cash equivalents, accounts receivable, accounts payable, and accrued liabilities, approximate their respective fair market values due to the short maturities of these financial instruments. The fair values of short-term investments are determined using quoted market prices for those securities or similar financial instruments.

          Dependence on Suppliers — The Company depends in part upon contractors to manufacture, assemble, and deliver items in a timely and satisfactory manner. The Company obtains certain components and subsystems from a single or a limited number of sources. A significant interruption in the delivery of such items or the demise of a supplier could have a material adverse effect on the Company’s operations.

          Cash and Cash Equivalents — The Company considers all highly liquid investments purchased with an original or remaining maturity of less than three months at the date of purchase to be cash equivalents. Cash and cash equivalents are maintained with various financial institutions.

46


          Investments — The Company’s short-term investments are comprised of U.S. Government agency securities, corporate notes and commercial paper. These investments are held in the custody of three major financial institutions. The specific identification method is used to determine the cost basis of fixed income securities disposed of. At June 30, 2009 and 2008, the Company’s investments were classified as available-for-sale. These investments are recorded in the Consolidated Balance Sheets at fair value with unrealized gains or losses reported as a separate component of accumulated other comprehensive income (loss), net of tax.

          The Company recognizes an impairment charge when a decline in the fair value of its investments below the cost basis is judged to be other-than-temporary. The Company considers various factors in determining whether to recognize an impairment charge, including the length of time and extent to which the fair value has been less than the Company’s cost basis, the financial condition and near-term prospects of the investee, and the Company’s intent and ability to hold the investment for a period of time sufficient to allow for any anticipated recovery in market value.

          Allowance for Doubtful Accounts. The Company records its allowance for doubtful accounts based upon its assessment of various factors. The Company considers historical experience, the age of the accounts receivable balances, the credit quality of its customers, current economic conditions and other factors that may affect customers’ ability to pay to determine the level of allowance required.

          The change in allowance for doubtful accounts is summarized as follows (in thousands):

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

June 30,

 

 

 



 

 

2009

 

2008

 

2007

 

 

 


 


 



Allowance for doubtful accounts — beginning

 

$

414

 

$

320

 

$

378

 

Current period provision

 

 

1,066

 

 

245

 

 

238

 

Write-offs charged to allowance (net of recoveries)

 

 

(150

)

 

(151

)

 

(296

)

 

 










Allowance for doubtful accounts — ending

 

$

1,330

 

$

414

 

$

320

 

 

 










          Inventories — Inventories, which consist principally of raw materials, finished goods and inventory in process/transit, are stated at the lower of cost or market, with cost being determined under a standard cost method that approximates first-in, first-out.

          Property and Equipment — Property and equipment are stated at cost. Depreciation is computed using the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the assets, which range from two to five years. Leasehold improvements are amortized over the shorter of the estimated useful lives of the asset or the lease term.

          Long-Lived Assets — The Company evaluates the carrying value of long-lived assets to be held and used including intangible assets, when events or circumstances warrant such a review. The carrying value of a long-lived asset to be held and used is considered impaired when the anticipated separately identifiable undiscounted cash flows from such an asset are less than the carrying value of the asset. In that event, an impairment loss is recognized based on the amount by which the carrying value exceeds the fair value of the long-lived asset. Fair value is determined primarily using the anticipated cash flows discounted at a rate commensurate with the risk involved.

          Revenue Recognition — The Company’s revenue is related to the sale of enterprise IP telecommunications systems, which include hardware, primarily phones and voice switches, and software components and may also include training, installation and post-contractual support for the products. The Company’s business strategy is centered on selling to enterprise customers through channel partners, rather than directly. Hence, sales transactions are generally made to a channel partner. Certain larger enterprise customers prefer to purchase directly from the Company. Many of these large account sales are channel partner-assisted and the Company compensates the channel partner in much the same way as if the channel partner had made the sale directly. The compensation to the channel partner is recorded as an offset to the revenues associated with the direct sale to the enterprise customer.

          Product Revenue. The Company’s software is integrated with hardware and is essential to the functionality of the integrated system product. Revenue is recognized for these sales in accordance with Statement of Position (SOP) No. 97-2, Software Revenue Recognition , as amended, and Securities and Exchange Commission Staff Accounting Bulletin (SAB) No. 104, Revenue Recognition , as applicable, depending on whether the hardware is sold in a multiple-element arrangement with software and post-contractual support or on a stand alone basis if the customer purchases hardware, software, or post- contractual support separately. At the initial purchase, the customer generally bundles together the hardware, software components and up to five years of post-contractual support. Thereafter, if the enterprise customer increases end users and functionality, it may add more hardware, software, and related post-contractual support by purchasing them separately. The Company evaluates vendor-specific objective evidence (VSOE) of fair value for post-contractual support, installation services and training, and other undelivered elements as noted below.

47


          Product revenue is recognized when persuasive evidence of an arrangement exists, product has shipped or delivery has occurred (depending on when title passes), the sales price is fixed or determinable and free of contingencies and significant uncertainties, and collection is probable. The fee is considered fixed or determinable at the execution of an agreement, based on specific products and quantities to be delivered at specified prices. The agreements with customers generally do not include rights of return or acceptance provisions. To the extent that the Company’s agreements contain acceptance terms, the Company recognizes revenue upon product acceptance, unless the acceptance provision is deemed to be perfunctory. Even though substantially all of the contractual agreements do not provide return privileges, there are circumstances for which the Company will accept a return. The Company maintains a reserve for such returns based on historical experience. Payment terms to customers generally range from net 30 to net 60 days. In the event payment terms are extended materially from the Company’s standard business practices, the fees are deemed to not be fixed or determinable and revenue is recognized when the payment becomes due. The Company assesses the ability to collect from its customers based on a number of factors, including credit worthiness and past transaction history of the customer. If the customer is not deemed credit worthy, the Company defers all revenue from the arrangement until payment is received and all other revenue recognition criteria have been met. Shipping charges billed to customers are included in product revenue and the related shipping costs are included in cost of product revenue.

          Provisions for return allowances and product warranties are recorded at the time revenue is recognized based on the Company’s historical experience. The provision for return allowances is recorded as a reduction to revenues on the statement of operations and is included as a reduction to account receivables on the balance sheet.

          The Company has arrangements with resellers of their products to reimburse the resellers for cooperative marketing costs meeting specified criteria. The reimbursements are limited to 50% of the actual costs charged to the channel partners by third-party vendors for advertising, trade show activities and other related sales and marketing activities for which the Company receives an identifiable benefit (goods and services that the Company could have purchased directly from third-party vendors), subject to a limit of the total cooperative marketing allowance earned by each channel partner. In accordance with EITF Issue No. 01-9, Accounting for Consideration Given by a Vendor to a Customer (including a Reseller of the Vendor’s Products) , the Company records the reimbursements to the channel partners meeting such specified criteria within sales and marketing expenses in the accompanying consolidated statements of operations.

          Post-Contractual Support. The Company’s support and service revenues are primarily derived from post-contractual support. The Company accounts for post-contractual support revenues based on SOP 97-2, which states that “If an arrangement includes multiple elements, the fee should be allocated to the various elements based on vendor-specific objective evidence of fair value, regardless of any separate prices stated within the contract for each element”. VSOE of fair value is limited to the price charged when the same element is sold separately. VSOE of fair value is established for post-contractual support through prior renewals of post-contractual support from existing customers, which establishes a price based on a stand alone sale. To determine the fair value of the price charged, we analyze both the selling prices when elements are sold separately as well as the concentrations of those prices. We believe those concentrations have been sufficient to enable us to establish VSOE of fair value for the post-contract support revenues.

          The Company offers one, three and five year post-contractual support contracts. The decision to procure support is elected by the enterprise customer, but most channel partners and their enterprise customers desire post-contractual support so an initial system sale usually includes post-contractual support. The majority of post-contractual support contracts are sold to channel partners, under which the channel partner provides first level support to the enterprise customer and the Company provides support, as needed, to the channel partner. In a lesser number of cases, the Company provides support directly to the enterprise customer.

          The Company uses the residual method, as allowed by SOP 98-9, Modification of SOP 97-2 Software Revenue Recognition With Respect to Certain Transactions , to determine the amount of product revenue to be recognized. Under the residual method, the fair value of the undelivered elements, such as post-contractual support installation services and training, is deferred and the remaining portion of the sales amount is recognized as product revenue. The fair value of the post-contractual support is recognized on a straight-line basis over the term of the related support period, which is typically one to five years.

          Installation and Training. Installation is sold on an elective basis. As installation is typically performed by the channel partner or enterprise customer, and it is not considered essential to the functionality of the delivered elements. Installation, when performed by the Company, is by its nature sold only with an accompanying system order. Installation is generally priced at established rates based on estimated hours required to install the accompanying system.

          The Company recognizes revenue related to installation services and training upon delivery of the service.

          If VSOE of fair value does not exist for installation, training or commitments to provide specified upgrades, services or additional products to customers in the future, as has been the case from time to time in the past, the Company defers all revenue from the arrangement until the earlier of the point at which VSOE of fair value does exist or all such elements from the arrangement have been delivered.

48


          Warranties — In November 2002, the Financial Accounting Standard Board (FASB) issued Financial Interpretation (FIN) No. 45 (FIN 45), Guarantor’s Accounting and Disclosure Requirements for Guarantee, Including Indirect Guarantees of Indebtedness of Others. FIN 45 requires a guarantor to include disclosures of certain obligations, and if applicable, at the inception of the guarantee, recognize a liability for the fair value of other obligations undertaken in issuing a guarantee.

          The majority of the Company’s products are covered by a one-year limited manufacturer’s warranty. Estimated contractual warranty obligations are recorded when related sales are recognized based on historical experience. The determination of such provision requires the Company to make estimates of product return rates and expected costs to repair or replace the product under warranty. If actual costs differ significantly from these estimates, additional amounts are recorded when such costs are probable and can be reasonably estimated. The provision for product warranties are recorded within cost of goods sold on the statement of operations and included within accrued liabilities on the balance sheet.

          The change in accrued warranty expense is summarized as follows (in thousands):

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

June 30,

 

 

 


 

 

 

2009

 

2008

 

2007

 

 

 


 


 


 

Accrued warranty balance — beginning

 

$

239

 

$

167

 

$

206

 

Current period accrual

 

 

292

 

 

313

 

 

512

 

Warranty expenditures charged to accrual

 

 

(270

)

 

(241

)

 

(416

)

Adjustment to estimate

 

 

 

 

 

 

(135

)

 

 



 



 



 

Accrued warranty balance — ending

 

$

261

 

$

239

 

$

167

 

 

 



 



 



 

          Research and Development Costs — Research and development expenditures, which include software development costs, are expensed as incurred. Software development costs incurred subsequent to the time a product’s technological feasibility has been established through the time the product is available for general release to customers are subject to capitalization.

          Income Taxes — The Company accounts for income taxes using the asset and liability method as prescribed by Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (SFAS) No. 109, Accounting for Income Taxes. Deferred income taxes are recognized by applying enacted statutory tax rates applicable to future years to differences between the financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets and liabilities and their respective tax bases and operating loss and tax credit carryforwards. The effect on deferred tax assets and liabilities of a change in tax rates is recognized in income in the period that includes the enactment date. The measurement of deferred tax assets is reduced, if necessary, by a valuation allowance for any tax benefit of which future realization is uncertain.

          Stock-Based Compensation — On July 1, 2006, the Company adopted SFAS No. 123 (revised 2004) (SFAS 123R), Share-Based Payment , which requires companies to measure the cost of employee services received in exchange for an award of equity instruments based on the grant date fair value of the award. The Company elected to use the Prospective Transition method such that SFAS 123R applies to new awards and to awards modified, repurchased or canceled after the effective date. The Company has a stock-based employee compensation plan (Option Plan). Generally, stock options granted to employees vest 25% one year or 50% two years from the grant date and 1/48 each month thereafter, and have a term of ten years.

          The following table shows total stock-based compensation expense included in the accompanying Consolidated Statements of Operations for the years ended June 30, 2009, 2008, and 2007 (in thousands):

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year Ended June 30,

 

 

 


 

 

 

2009

 

2008

 

2007

 

 

 


 


 


 

Cost of product revenue

 

$

106

 

$

59

 

$

12

 

Cost of support and services revenue

 

 

716

 

 

503

 

 

99

 

Research and development

 

 

2,692

 

 

1,885

 

 

384

 

Sales and marketing

 

 

3,122

 

 

2,358

 

 

533

 

General and administrative

 

 

2,259

 

 

2,135

 

 

1,658

 

 

 



 



 



 

Total stock-based compensation expense

 

$

8,895

 

$

6,940

 

$

2,686

 

 

 



 



 



 

          The income tax benefit associated with stock-based compensation expense for the year ended June 30, 2009 and June 30, 2008 was $0.2 million and $1.4 million, respectively. The income tax benefit for year ended June 30, 2007 was not significant.

          The Company accounts for stock issued to non-employees in accordance with the provisions of EITF Issue No. 96-18, Accounting for Equity Instruments that are Issued to Other Than Employees for Acquiring, or in Conjunction with Selling Goods or Services. The Company uses the Black-Scholes option-pricing model to value options granted to non-employees. The related expense is recorded over the period in which the related services are received.

          Foreign currency translation — The Company’s foreign operations are subject to exchange rate fluctuations and foreign currency transaction costs, however, the majority of sales transactions are denominated in U.S. dollars. Foreign currency denominated sales, costs and expenses are recorded at the average exchange rates during the year. Gains or losses resulting from foreign currency transactions are included in other income in the consolidated statements of operations.

49


          Comprehensive income (loss) Comprehensive income (loss) is defined as the change in equity during a period from nonowner sources. Comprehensive income (loss) consists of net income (loss) and other comprehensive income (loss), which is a separate component of stockholders’ equity. Other comprehensive income (loss) includes unrealized gains and losses on the Company’s available-for-sale securities. Other comprehensive income (loss) for fiscal years 2009, 2008 and 2007 has been disclosed within the consolidated statement of stockholders’ equity and comprehensive income.

          Recent Accounting Pronouncements —In June 2009, the FASB issued SFAS No. 168, The FASB Accounting Standards Codification and the Hierarchy of Generally Accepted Accounting Principles —a replacement of SFAS 162 (SFAS No. 168), establishing codification, which integrates and categorizes all guidance by standard setters within levels A through D of the previous GAAP hierarchy. SFAS No. 168 will replace all existing GAAP for non-governmental entities and will establish a new hierarchy of GAAP, both authoritative and non-authoritative. SFAS No. 168 is effective for interim and annual periods ending after September 15, 2009 and will be adopted by the Company beginning in the first quarter of its fiscal year 2010. The Company does not expect the adoption to have a material impact on its consolidated results of operations and financial condition.

          In May 2009, the FASB issued SFAS No. 165, Subsequent Events (SFAS No. 165), which updates previous guidance under GAAP by replacing “type 1” and “type 2” with “recognized” and “unrecognized,” and requires disclosure in financial statements of the date through which subsequent events have been evaluated. SFAS No. 165 is effective for interim and annual periods ending after June 15, 2009 and was adopted by the Company beginning in the fourth quarter of its fiscal year 2009. The adoption of SFAS No. 165 did not have a material impact on the Company’s consolidated results of operations and financial condition.

          In April 2009, the FASB issued FASB Staff Position (FSP) SFAS No. 157-4, Fair Value Measurements (FSP No. 157-4), which supersedes FSP SFAS 157-3 and provides additional guidance on estimating fair value when volume and level of transaction activity for the asset or liability have significantly decreased. FSP SFAS No. 157-4 is effective for interim and annual periods ending after June 15, 2009 and was adopted by the Company in the fourth quarter of its fiscal year 2009. The adoption of FSP SFAS No. 157-4 did not have a material impact on the Company’s consolidated results of operations and financial condition.

          In April 2009, the FASB issued FSP No. FAS 115-2 and FAS 124-2, Recognition of Other-Than-Temporary Impairments (“FSP FAS 115-2 and FAS 124-2”). FSP FAS 115-2 and FAS 124-2 amends the other-than-temporary impairment guidance in SFAS 115, Accounting for Certain Investments in Debt and Equity Securities , for debt securities and the presentation and disclosure requirements of other-than-temporary impairments on debt and equity securities in the financial statements. FSP FAS 115-2 and FAS 124-2 is effective for interim and annual reporting periods ending after June 15, 2009, with early adoption permitted for periods ending after March 15, 2009. The adoption of FSP 115-2/124-2 did not have a material impact on the Company’s consolidated results of operations and financial condition.

          In October 2008, the FASB issued FASB Staff Position FAS 157-3, Determining the Fair Value of a Financial Asset When the Market for That Asset Is Not Active (“FSP 157-3”). FSP 157-3 clarified the application of FAS 157. FSP 157-3 demonstrated how the fair value of a financial asset is determined when the market for that financial asset is inactive. FSP 157-3 was effective upon issuance, including prior periods for which financial statements had not been issued. The implementation of this standard did not have an impact on the Company’s financial position, results of operations or cash flow.

          In February 2007, the FASB issued SFAS No. 159, The Fair Value Option for Financial Assets and Financial Liabilities — Including an amendment of FASB Statement No. 115 . Under SFAS No. 159, a company may elect to use fair value to measure eligible items at specified election dates and report unrealized gains and losses on items for which the fair value option has been elected in earnings at each subsequent reporting date. The Company has adopted SFAS 159 beginning July 1, 2008 and did not elect the fair value option to measure eligible financial assets and financial liabilities.

          In September 2006, the FASB issued Statement No. 157, Fair Value Measurements (SFAS 157). SFAS 157 defines fair value, establishes a framework and gives guidance regarding the methods used for measuring fair value, and expands disclosures about fair value measurements. SFAS No. 157 is effective for financial assets and liabilities on financial statements issued for fiscal years beginning after November 15, 2007, and interim periods within those fiscal years. FASB Staff Position No. 157-1 amends SFAS No. 157 to remove certain leasing transactions from its scope. FASB Staff Position No. 157-2 (FSP No. 157-2) delays the effective date for non-financial assets and liabilities, except for items that are recognized or disclosed at fair value in the financial statements on a recurring basis (at least annually). The provisions of SFAS No. 157 should be applied prospectively as of the beginning of the fiscal year in which SFAS No. 157 is initially applied, except in limited circumstances. The Company has adopted SFAS No. 157 beginning July 1, 2008, and there was no material impact on the Company’s condensed consolidated financial statements (see Note 4).

50


2. BALANCE SHEET COMPONENTS

          Balance sheet components consisted of the following:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

As of June 30,

 

 

 


 

 

 

2009

 

2008

 

 

 


 


 

 

 

(Amounts in thousands)

 

Inventories:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Raw materials

 

$

398

 

$

 

Inventory in process/transit

 

 

962

 

 

253

 

Finished goods

 

 

10,445

 

 

11,755

 

 

 



 



 

Total inventories

 

$

11,805

 

$

12,008

 

 

 



 



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Prepaid expenses and other current assets:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Prepaid expenses

 

$

2,435

 

$

2,614

 

Deferred cost of revenue

 

 

315

 

 

701

 

Deferred taxes

 

 

360

 

 

1,748

 

 

 



 



 

Total prepaid expenses and other current assets

 

$

3,110

 

$

5,063

 

 

 



 



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Property and equipment:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Computer equipment and tooling

 

$

5,281

 

$

4,656

 

Software

 

 

1,086

 

 

943

 

Furniture and fixtures

 

 

1,064

 

 

759

 

Leasehold improvements & others

 

 

387

 

 

298

 

 

 



 



 

Total property and equipment

 

$

7,818

 

$

6,656

 

Less accumulated depreciation and amortization

 

 

4,343

 

 

3,007

 

 

 



 



 

Property and equipment — Net

 

$

3,475

 

$

3,649

 

 

 



 



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Deferred revenue:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Product

 

$

988

 

$

2,410

 

Support and services

 

 

21,503

 

 

16,255

 

 

 



 



 

Total deferred revenue

 

$

22,491

 

$

18,665

 

 

 



 



 

          The following is a summary of the Company’s long-term other assets (in thousands):

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

June 30, 2009

 

June 30, 2008

 

 

 


 


 

 

 

Gross
Carrying
Amount

 

Accumulated
Amortization

 

Net Carrying
Amount

 

Gross
Carrying
Amount

 

Accumulated
Amortization

 

Net Carrying
Amount

 

 

 


 






 


 


 

Licensed technology

 

$

1,760

 

$

(57

)

$

1,703

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

Purchased technology

 

 

2,578

 

 

(74

)

 

2,504

 

 

100

 

 

 

 

100

 

 

 



 



 



 



 



 



 

Other intangible assets

 

$

4,338

 

$

(131

)

 

4,207

 

$

100

 

$

 

 

100

 

 

 



 



 

 

 

 



 



 

 

 

 

Prepaid royalties

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2,285

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1,999

 

Deferred tax asset

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1,388

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Deposits and other

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

234

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

258

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 



 

 

 

 

 

 

 



 

Total other assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

$

8,114

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

$

2,357

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 



 

 

 

 

 

 

 



 

51


3. CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS AND SHORT-TERM INVESTMENTS

          The following is a summary of the Company’s cash and cash equivalents and short-term investments (in thousands):

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

June 30, 2009

 

 

 


 

 

 

Amortized Cost

 

Gross Unrealized
Gains

 

Gross Unrealized
Losses

 

Fair Value

 

 

 


 


 


 


 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash

 

$

9,115

 

$

 

$

 

$

9,115

 

Cash equivalents-Money market funds

 

 

64,704

 

 

 

 

 

 

64,704

 

 

 



 



 



 



 

Total cash and cash equivalents

 

 

73,819

 

 

 

 

 

 

73,819

 

 

 



 



 



 



 

Short-term investments:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Corporate notes and commercial paper

 

 

24,209

 

 

111

 

 

 

 

24,320

 

U.S. Government agency securities

 

 

9,502

 

 

25

 

 

 

 

9,527

 

 

 



 



 



 



 

Total short-term investments

 

 

33,711

 

 

136

 

 

 

 

33,847

 

 

 



 



 



 



 

Total cash and cash equivalents and short-term investments

 

$

107,530

 

$

136

 

$

 

$

107,666

 

 

 



 



 



 



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

June 30, 2008

 

 

 


 

 

 

Amortized Cost

 

Gross Unrealized
Gains

 

Gross Unrealized
Losses

 

Fair Value

 

 

 


 


 


 


 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash

 

$

10,796

 

$

 

$

 

$

10,796

 

Cash equivalents-Money market funds

 

 

57,876

 

 

 

 

 

 

57,876

 

 

 



 



 



 



 

Total cash and cash equivalents

 

 

68,672

 

 

 

 

 

 

68,672

 

 

 



 



 



 



 

Short-term investments:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Corporate notes and commercial paper

 

 

15,607

 

 

5

 

 

(58

)

 

15,554

 

U.S. Government agency securities

 

 

18,608

 

 

2

 

 

(25

)

 

18,585

 

 

 



 



 



 



 

Total short-term investments

 

 

34,215

 

 

7

 

 

(83

)

 

34,139

 

 

 



 



 



 



 

Total cash and cash equivalents and short-term investments

 

$

102,887

 

$

7

 

$

(83

)

$

102,811

 

 

 



 



 



 



 

          The following table summarizes the cost and estimated fair value of the Company’s cash equivalents and short-term investments by contractual maturity at June 30, 2009 (in thousands):

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Amortized Cost

 

Fair Value

 

 

 


 


 

 

 

Due within one year

 

$

71,350

 

$

71,381

 

Due one year to three years

 

 

27,065

 

 

27,170

 

 

 



 



 

 

 

$

98,415

 

$

98,551

 

 

 



 



 

 

          The following table summarizes the maturities of the Company’s cash equivalents and short-term investments by contractual maturity at June 30, 2008 (in thousands):

 

 

 

Amortized Cost

 

Fair Value

 

 

 


 


 

 

 

Due within one year

 

$

85,366

 

$

85,348

 

Due one year to three years

 

 

6,725

 

 

6,667

 

 

 



 



 

 

 

$

92,091

 

$

92,015

 

 

 



 



 

          Actual maturities may differ from the contractual maturities because borrowers may have the right to call or prepay certain obligations.

4. FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENTS

          On July 1, 2008, the Company adopted Statement of Financial Accounting Standards 157, “Fair Value Measurements,” (SFAS No. 157). SFAS No. 157 defines fair value as the price that would be received from selling an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. When determining the fair value measurements for assets and liabilities required or permitted to be recorded at fair value, the Company considers the principal or most advantageous market in which the Company would transact and the Company considers assumptions that market participants would use when pricing the asset or liability, such as inherent risk, transfer restrictions, and risk of nonperformance.

52


Fair Value Hierarchy

          SFAS No. 157 discusses valuation techniques, such as the market approach (comparable market prices), the income approach (present value of future income or cash flow), and the cost approach (cost to replace the service capacity of an asset or replacement cost). SFAS No. 157 establishes a fair value hierarchy that requires an entity to maximize the use of observable inputs and minimize the use of unobservable inputs when measuring fair value. A financial instrument’s categorization within the fair value hierarchy is based upon the lowest level of input that is significant to the fair value measurement. SFAS No. 157 establishes three levels of inputs that may be used to measure fair value:

Level 1 - Valuation is based upon quoted prices for identical instruments traded in active markets.

Level 2 - Valuation is based upon quoted prices for similar instruments in active markets, quoted prices for identical or similar instruments in markets that are not active, and model-based valuation techniques for which all significant assumptions are observable in the market.

Level 3 - Valuation is generated from model-based techniques that use significant assumptions not observable in the market. These unobservable assumptions reflect estimates of assumptions that market participants would use in pricing the asset or liability. Valuation techniques include use of option pricing models, discounted cash flows models and similar techniques.

Determination of Fair Value

          The Company’s cash equivalents and investment instruments are classified within Level 1 or Level 2 of the fair value hierarchy because they are valued using quoted market prices, broker or dealer quotations, market prices received from industry standard pricing data providers or alternative pricing sources with reasonable levels of price transparency. Money market funds are classified as Level 1 because these securities are valued based on quoted market prices in active markets. US Government agency securities, corporate notes and commercial paper are classified as Level 2 because markets for these securities are less active or valuations for such securities utilize significant inputs that are directly or indirectly observable.

          The table below sets forth the Company’s cash equivalents and short-term investments measured at fair value on a recurring basis (in thousands):

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fair Value Measurements at June 30, 2009 Using

 

 

 


 

 

 

Total

 

Quoted Prices
in Active
Markets for
Identical
Assets
(Level 1)

 

Significant
Other
Observable
Inputs
(Level 2)

 

Significant
Unobservable
Inputs
(Level 3)

 

 

 


 


 


 


 

Assets:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Money market funds

 

$

64,704

 

$

64,704

 

$

 

$

 

Corporate notes and commercial paper

 

 

24,320

 

 

 

 

24,320

 

 

 

 

U.S. Government agency securities

 

 

9,527

 

 

 

 

9,527

 

 

 

 

 



 



 



 



 

 

 

$

98,551

 

$

64,704

 

$

33,847

 

$

 

 

 



 



 



 



 

The above table excludes $9.1 million of cash balances on deposit at banks.

5. NET INCOME (LOSS) PER COMMON SHARE

          Basic net income (loss) per common share available to common stockholders is determined by dividing net income (loss) available to common stockholders by the weighted average number of common shares during the period. Diluted net income (loss) per common share available to common stockholders is determined by dividing net income (loss) available to common stockholders by the weighted average number of common shares used in the basic net income (loss) per common share calculation, plus the number of common shares that would be issued assuming conversion of all potentially dilutive securities outstanding under the treasury stock method.

          The following table is a reconciliation of the numerators and denominators used in computing basic and diluted net income (loss) per common share available to common stockholders:

53



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year Ended June 30,

 

 

 


 

 

 

2009

 

2008

 

2007

 

 

 


 


 


 

 

 

(In thousands, except per share amounts)

 

Numerator:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net income (loss) available to common stockholders

 

$

(11,796

)

$

2,633

 

$

6,031

 

 

 



 



 



 

Denominator:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Weighted average common shares outstanding

 

 

43,756

 

 

42,852

 

 

9,713

 

Weighted average common shares subject to repurchase

 

 

(42

)

 

(439

)

 

(1,148

)

 

 



 



 



 

Weighted average common shares outstanding (basic)

 

 

43,714

 

 

42,413

 

 

8,565

 

Effect of dilutive securities:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Weighted average common shares subject to repurchase

 

 

 

 

439

 

 

1,148

 

Common equivalent shares from employee stock plans

 

 

 

 

2,009

 

 

2,484

 

Common equivalent shares from common stock warrants

 

 

 

 

 

 

68

 

Conversion of redeemable convertible preferred stock

 

 

 

 

 

 

23,316

 

 

 



 



 



 

Weighted average common shares outstanding (diluted)

 

 

43,714

 

 

44,861

 

 

35,581

 

Net income (loss) per common share available to common stockholders:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Basic

 

$

(0.27

)

$

0.06

 

$

0.70

 

 

 



 



 



 

Diluted

 

$

(0.27

)

$

0.06

 

$

0.17

 

 

 



 



 



 

          Anti-dilutive common equivalent shares related to stock options excluded from the calculation of diluted shares were approximately 5.8 million, 3.1 million, and 0.4 million for the years ended June 30, 2009, 2008, and 2007 respectively.

6. INCOME TAXES

          The components of income (loss) before income taxes consist of (in thousands):

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

June 30,

 

 

 


 

 

 

2009

 

2008

 

2007

 

 

 


 


 


 

Domestic

 

$

(11,621

)

$

3,393

 

$

6,423

 

Foreign

 

 

168

 

 

101

 

 

66

 

 

 



 



 



 

Total

 

$

(11,453

)

$

3,494

 

$

6,489

 

 

 



 



 



 

          The provision for income taxes consists of the following for the years ended June 30 (in thousands):

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year Ended June 30,

 

 

 


 

 

 

2009

 

2008

 

2007

 

 

 


 


 


 

Current:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Federal

 

$

100

 

$

2,430

 

$

178

 

State

 

 

165

 

 

207

 

 

199

 

Foreign

 

 

78

 

 

(28

)

 

31

 

 

 



 



 



 

 

 

 

343

 

 

2,609

 

 

408

 

 

 



 



 



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Deferred:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Federal

 

 

 

 

(1,667

)

 

 

State

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Foreign

 

 

 

 

(81

)

 

 

 

 



 



 



 

 

 

 

 

 

(1,748

)

 

 

 

 



 



 



 

Total

 

$

343

 

$

861

 

$

408

 

 

 



 



 



 

          The difference between the income tax provision and the amount computed by applying the federal statutory income tax rate to income before income taxes is as follows for the years ended June 30 (in thousands):

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

June 30,

 

 

 


 

 

 

2009

 

2008

 

2007

 

 

 


 


 


 

Income tax provision at federal statutory rate

 

$

(3,896

)

$

1,223

 

$

2,206

 

Elimination of NOL and R&D tax credit carryforwards

 

 

 

 

26,939

 

 

1,569

 

Stock-based compensation

 

 

(220

)

 

1,124

 

 

423

 

Credits

 

 

(1,862

)

 

(1,032

)

 

(1,467

)

State taxes

 

 

118

 

 

206

 

 

668

 

Other

 

 

(15

)

 

(49

)

 

530

 

54



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

June 30,

 

 

 


 

 

 

2009

 

2008

 

2007

 

 

 


 


 


 

Increase (decrease) in valuation allowance

 

 

6,218

 

 

(27,550

)

 

(3,521

)

 

 



 



 



 

Total

 

$

343

 

$

861

 

$

408

 

 

 



 



 



 

          Significant components of deferred tax assets consist of the following as of June 30 (in thousands):

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

June 30,

 

 

 


 

 

 

2009

 

2008

 

 

 


 


 

Net operating loss carryforwards

 

$

31

 

$

26

 

Tax credit carryforwards

 

 

2,615

 

 

1,666

 

Other

 

 

10,697

 

 

5,433

 

 

 



 



 

Total deferred tax assets

 

 

13,343

 

 

7,125

 

Less valuation allowance

 

 

(11,595

)

 

(5,377

)

 

 



 



 

Net deferred tax assets

 

$

1,748

 

$

1,748

 

 

 



 



 

          During the year ended June 30, 2009, the increase in valuation allowance of $6.2 million was primarily related to the increase in the R&D credit, stock-based compensation and other timing differences. In assessing the realizability of deferred tax assets, management considers whether it is more likely than not that some portion or all of deferred tax assets will not be realized. The realization of deferred tax assets is based on several factors, including the Company’s past earnings and the scheduling of deferred tax liabilities and projected income from operating activities. As of June 30, 2009, management does not believe it is more likely than not that $11.6 million of the $13.3 million net deferred tax assets relating to U.S. federal and state operations are realizable. The Company intends to maintain the valuation allowance until sufficient positive evidence exists to support reversal of some or all of the allowance. In addition, the occurrence of negative evidence with respect to deferred tax assets which currently have no valuation allowance could result in an increase in the valuation allowance in a future period. The Company’s income tax expense (benefit) recorded in the future will be reduced or increased in the event changes to the valuation allowance are required.

          As of June 30, 2009, the Company had federal and California tax credit carryforwards of $0.9 million and $2.6 million, respectively. The federal tax credit carryforwards expire at various dates between 2026 and 2028. The federal Alternative Minimum Tax and the California tax credits may be carryforward indefinitely. The Company also had other state net operating loss carryforwards of $1.4 million which expire at various dates between 2015 and 2017.

          Under APB Opinion No. 23, “Accounting for Income Taxes – Special Areas”, the undistributed earnings from the foreign subsidiaries’ are not subject to a U.S. tax provision because it is Company’s intention to permanently reinvest such undistributed earnings outside of the United States. APB Opinion No. 23 requires that the Company evaluates its circumstances and reassesses this determination on a periodic basis. As of June 30, 2009, the determination of the unrecorded deferred tax liability related to these earnings is not practicable. If circumstances change and it becomes apparent that some or all of the undistributed earnings of the Company’s foreign subsidiaries will be remitted in the foreseeable future, the Company will be required to recognize a deferred tax liability on those amounts.

          During the year ended June 30, 2008, management completed its analysis of the Company’s multiple equity transactions since inception and determined that changes in ownership had occurred as defined by Section 382 of the Internal Revenue Code. As a result of the ownership changes, management has determined that substantially all of the Company’s federal and state net operating loss carryforwards could not be utilized. Consequently, approximately $26.2 million of the deferred tax asset associated with net operating loss carryforwards and $0.7 million of California research and development tax credit carryforwards as of June 30, 2007 were eliminated in fiscal 2008 with a corresponding reduction in the valuation allowance.

          The Company maintains liabilities for uncertain tax positions. These liabilities involve considerable judgment and estimation and are continuously monitored by management based on the best information available, including changes in tax regulations, the outcome of relevant court cases, and other information. As of June 30, 2009 and June 30, 2008, the Company’s total amount of unrecognized tax benefit was approximately $1.5 million and $1.5 million, respectively. These amounts are primarily related to the Company’s research and development tax credits.

          A reconciliation of the beginning and ending balances of the total amounts of unrecognized tax benefits for 2009 and 2008 is as follows (in thousands):

55


 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

June 30,

 

 

 


 

 

 

2009

 

2008  

 

 

 


 


 

Beginning balance

 

$

1,525

 

$

1,220

 

Increase (decrease) in tax positions for prior years

 

 

(435

)

 

 

Increase (decrease) in tax positions for current year

 

 

450

 

 

305

 

 

 



 



 

Ending balance

 

$

1,540

 

$

1,525

 

 

 



 



 

          As of June 30, 2009, the Company’s total amount of unrecognized tax benefit was approximately $1.5 million of which none, if recognized, would impact the effective tax rate as the Company has a valuation allowance on its carryforward attributes. The Company does not expect its unrecognized tax benefits to change materially over the next 12 months.

          The Company’s policy is to include interest and penalties related to unrecognized tax benefits within the provision for taxes on the consolidated condensed statements of operations. Management determined that no accrual for interest and penalties was required as of June 30, 2009.

          While Management believes that the Company has adequately provided for all tax positions, amounts asserted by tax authorities could be greater or less than the recorded position. Accordingly, the Company’s provisions on federal, state and foreign tax-related matters to be recorded in the future may change as revised estimates are made or the underlying matters are settled or otherwise resolved.

          The Company’s primary tax jurisdiction is in the United States. For federal and state tax purposes, the tax years 2000 through 2009 remain open and subject to tax examination by the appropriate federal or state taxing authorities.

7. COMMON STOCK

 

 

 

Common Shares Subject to Repurchase

 

 

 

Shares of common stock subject to repurchase in connection with the early exercise of incentive stock options under the Company’s stock option plan were 20,626 and 126,082 at June 30, 2009 and 2008, respectively.

 

 

 

Common Shares Reserved for Issuance

          At June 30, 2009, the Company has reserved shares of common stock for issuance as follows (in thousands):

 

 

 

 

 

Reserved under stock option plans

 

 

11,122

 

Reserved under employee stock purchase plan

 

 

677

 

Conversion of warrants

 

 

2

 

 

 



 

Total

 

 

11,801

 

 

 



 

8. STOCK-BASED COMPENSATION

 

 

 

Determining Fair Value of Stock Compensation

          Valuation and amortization method — The Company estimates the fair value of stock options granted using the Black-Scholes option-pricing formula and a single option award approach. This fair value is then amortized on a straight-line basis over the requisite service periods of the awards, which is generally the vesting period.

          Expected Term — The expected term represents the period that the Company’s stock-based awards are expected to be outstanding. The Company has elected to use the simplified method described in SAB 110 to compute expected term. The Company’s stock plan provides for a 10 year term to expiration. Prior to and during fiscal year 2007, the Company categorized option grants into two classes. Class One includes all options issued with standard four year vesting and no ability to exercise prior to vesting. Class Two includes options granted that have the same four year vesting provision but allow for early exercisability. The Company discontinued granting Class Two options as of June 30, 2007. The options in Class One vest over four years with a one or two year cliff. Based on the above, the Company computed an expected term of 6.08 years for the one year cliff and 6.46 for the two year cliff under the simplified method. The options in Class Two are early exercisable at the discretion of the option holder and vest over 4 years with a one or two year cliff. For Class Two, the Company assumed an expected term of 4 years based, in part, on the history of prior exercises for this class of optionees.

          On January 2, 2009, the Company filed with the SEC a Schedule TO with respect to the proposed stock option exchange program under which U.S. employees holding stock options with exercise prices greater than $9.50 per share could tender their options in exchange for an equivalent number of new stock options to be granted under the 2007 Equity Incentive Plan (“Tender Offer”). The Tender Offer was subject to approval by the Company’s stockholders and such approval was obtained at a Special

56


Meeting of Stockholders held on February 2, 2009. The new stock options will vest on a four-year schedule, with either (1) 25% of the shares subject to the option vesting on the first anniversary of the date of grant, and the remainder vesting ratably on a monthly basis over the next three years or (2) 50% of the shares subject to the option vesting on the second anniversary of the date of grant, and the remainder vesting ratably on a monthly basis over the next two years. The vesting schedule would be determined based on the vesting schedule of the surrendered option. The new stock options have a 7 year term to expiration. The expected term of the new stock options ranged from 4.58 to 4.76 years. See note 9 for additional information related to the Tender Offer.

          Expected Volatility — The Company estimates volatility for option grants by evaluating the average historical volatility of its peer group for the period immediately preceding the option grant for a term that is approximately equal to the option’s expected term. The Company has estimated future volatility based on its peer group, as it does not have enough history to calculate its own volatility. Management believes historical volatility to be the best estimate of future volatility. Volatility will be analyzed on an annual basis unless management becomes aware of events that would indicate more frequent analysis is necessary.

          Risk-Free Interest Rate — The risk-free interest rate used in the Black-Scholes valuation method is based on the implied yield currently available on U.S. Treasury zero-coupon issues with an equivalent remaining term.

          Expected Dividend — The Company has not issued dividends to date and does not anticipate issuing dividends.

          The fair value of each option is estimated on the date of grant using the Black-Scholes option valuation method, with the following assumptions:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year Ended

 

 


 

 

 

 

 

 

June 30, 2007

 

 

 

 

 

 


 

 

June 30, 2009

 

June 30, 2008

 

Class One

 

Class Two

 

 


 


 


 


Expected life from grant date of option

 

4.58-6.46 years

 

6.08 years

 

6.08 years

 

4.0 years

Risk-free interest rate

 

1.76-3.11%

 

2.42-4.50%

 

4.6-4.8%

 

4.6-4.8%

Expected volatility

 

58-59%

 

62%

 

71%

 

55%

Expected dividend yield

 

0%

 

0%

 

0%

 

0%

          The fair value of each stock purchase right granted for ESPP is estimated using the Black-Scholes option valuation method, using the following assumptions:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year Ended

 

 


 

 

June 30, 2009

 

June 30, 2008

 

June 30, 2007

 

 


 


 


Expected life from grant date of ESPP

 

0.50 years

 

0.50 years

 

Risk-free interest rate

 

0.31-1.81%

 

2.03-2.49%

 

Expected volatility

 

92-138%

 

47-136%

 

Expected dividend yield

 

0%

 

0%

 

          SFAS 123(R) requires that the Company recognize compensation expense only for the portion of stock options that are expected to vest, assuming an expected forfeiture rate in determining stock-based compensation expense, which could affect the stock-based compensation expense recorded if there is a significant difference between actual and estimated forfeiture rates. The estimated forfeiture rate in the year ended June 30, 2009 was 11.6%. As of June 30, 2009, total unrecognized compensation cost related to stock-based awards granted to employees and non-employee directors was $24.0 million, net of estimated forfeitures of $7.5 million. This cost will be amortized on a straight-line basis over a weighted average period of approximately three years.

9. STOCK OPTION PLAN

          The 1997 stock option plan (the “1997 Plan”), as amended, provides for granting incentive stock options (“ISOs”) and nonqualified stock options (“NSOs”) for shares of common stock to employees, directors, and consultants of the Company. In accordance with the 1997 Plan, the stated exercise price shall not be less than 100% and 85% of the estimated fair market value of common stock on the date of grant for ISOs and NSOs, respectively, as determined by the Board of Directors. The 1997 Plan provides that the options shall be exercisable over a period not to exceed ten years. Options generally vest ratably over four years from the date of grant. Options granted to certain executive officers are exercisable immediately and unvested shares issued upon exercise are subject to repurchase by the Company at the exercise price. (“Class Two Options”). During 2009, 1,167 unvested shares were repurchased. There were no repurchases of unvested shares in 2008. The Company’s repurchase right for such options lapses as the options vest, generally over four years from the date of grant.

          Class Two options granted to certain executive officers and non-employee directors in fiscal years 2007 and prior are exercisable immediately and shares issued upon exercise are subject to repurchase by the Company at the exercise price, in the event the employee is terminated; such repurchase right lapses gradually over a four year period. The Company does not consider the exercise of stock options substantive when the issued stock is subject to repurchase. Accordingly, the proceeds from the exercise of such options are accounted for as a deposit liability until the repurchase right lapses, at which time the proceeds are reclassified to

57


permanent equity. As of June 30, 2009 and 2008, there were 20,626 and 126,082 shares subject to repurchase, respectively, of the Company’s common stock outstanding and $19,000 and $72,000, respectively, of related recorded liability, which is included in accrued liabilities.

          During fiscal year 2006 the Company had outstanding loans to certain executives and employees pursuant to the 1997 Plan for the purchase of stock upon the exercise of incentive stock options in the aggregate amounts of $231,000. The loan agreements allow the Company to repurchase the unvested shares within 60 days of termination at a price equal to the original exercise price. The loans bear interest at rates ranging from 6.4% — 8.0% per annum and are due upon the earlier of termination of employment or four years from the option exercise date. All loans were due by June 30, 2006. In fiscal 2002, as part of his termination settlement, the Company repurchased unvested shares and amended the terms of the remaining notes issued to the former CEO, such that they are nonrecourse. In March 2003, the Company amended the terms of the loans, such that they are nonrecourse. Of the 271,790 shares purchased, 127,418 were unvested at the time of the note amendments. Due to the conversion of these full recourse notes to non-recourse, the deemed new awards were subject to variable accounting until the loans were settled. As such, additional stock-based compensation expense was recorded to the extent the Company’s share price appreciated above the value for which the Company had already recorded compensation charges. Stock-based compensation expense recorded for these awards in fiscal 2009, 2008, and 2007 was $0, $0 and $1,377,000, respectively.

          The 2007 Equity Incentive Plan (the “2007 Plan”), as amended, provides for grants of incentive common stock options (“ISOs”) and nonqualified common stock options (“NSOs”) to employees, directors and consultants of the Company. This plan serves as the successor to the 1997 Plan, which terminated in January 2007. Five million shares of common stock are reserved for future issuance in the form of stock options, restricted stock awards or units, stock appreciation rights and stock bonuses. In February 2008, pursuant to the automatic increase provisions of the 2007 Plan, the Company’s board of directors increased the number of shares authorized and reserved for issuance under the 2007 Plan by 2.1 million and 2.2 million in 2008 and 2009, respectively. In accordance with the 2007 Plan, the stated exercise price of ISOs and NSOs shall not be less than 100% and 85%, respectively, of the estimated fair market value of common stock on the date of grant, as determined by the Board of Directors. Additionally, the 2007 Plan provides for automatic annual increases of shares available for issuance of up to 5% of the number of common shares then outstanding. The 2007 Plan provides that the options shall be exercisable over a period not to exceed ten years. During fiscal 2009 and 2008 the Company granted options for 4,889,000 and 3,518,000 shares of common stock, respectively, under its 2007 Plan. The 4,889,000 options granted during fiscal 2009 include 3,215,000 shares issued under a Tender Offer.

          Tender Offer

          On January 2, 2009, the Company filed with the SEC a Schedule TO with respect to the proposed stock option exchange program under which U.S. employees holding stock options with exercise prices greater than $9.50 per share could tender their options in exchange for an equivalent number of new stock options to be granted under the 2007 Equity Incentive Plan (“Tender Offer”).

          The new stock options will vest on a four-year schedule, with either (1) 25% of the shares subject to the option vesting on the first anniversary of the date of grant, and the remainder vesting ratably on a monthly basis over the next three years or (2) 50% of the shares subject to the option vesting on the second anniversary of the date of grant, and the remainder vesting ratably on a monthly basis over the next two years. The vesting schedule would be determined based on the vesting schedule of the surrendered option.

          The Tender Offer expired on February 2, 2009. The Tender Offer was subject to approval by the Company’s stockholders and such approval was obtained at a Special Meeting of Stockholders held on February 2, 2009.

          The Company accepted for exchange, options to purchase an aggregate of 3,215,000 shares of the Company’s common stock from 212 eligible participants, representing 99% of the shares subject to options that were eligible to be exchanged in the Tender Offer. Upon the terms and subject to the conditions set forth in the Tender Offer, the Company issued new options to purchase an aggregate of 3,215,000 shares of the Company’s common stock at an exercise price of $4.82 in exchange for the options surrendered in the Tender Offer. The fair value of the new options was measured as the total of the unrecognized compensation cost of the original options tendered and the incremental compensation cost of the new options awarded on February 2, 2009, the date of cancellation. The incremental compensation cost was measured as the excess of the fair value of the old options over the fair value of the options immediately before cancellation based on the share price and other pertinent factors at that date. The incremental cost of the 3,215,000 options was $3.9 million, which included estimated forfeitures of $0.9 million, for a net incremental cost of $3.0 million. The $15.3 million remaining unamortized expense of the original options and the $3.0 million incremental compensation cost for the new options will be recognized as stock-based compensation expense ratably over the vesting period of the new options. As would be the case with eligible options, in the event that any of the new options are forfeited prior to their vesting due to termination of service, the stock-based compensation cost for the forfeited new options will not be recorded. In the event that any of the new options are forfeited, due to termination of service, prior to vesting under the terms of the new grants, stock-based compensation costs will not be recorded for the unvested incremental portion of the option; furthermore, stock-based compensation costs will be recorded for the original portion of the option up to an including the termination of service date.

58


          A summary of the activity under the Company’s 1997 and 2007 Option Plans is presented below:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Shares
Available
for
Grant

 

Shares
Subject to
Options
Outstanding

 

Weighted-
Average
Exercise
Price

 

 

 


 


 


 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Outstanding — July 1, 2006

 

 

923

 

 

3,078

 

$

0.60

 

Shares authorized

 

 

6,030

 

 

 

 

 

Options granted — Class 1 (weighted average fair value of $6.02 per share)

 

 

(2,094

)

 

2,094

 

 

8.89

 

Options granted — Class 2 (weighted average fair value of $5.00 per share)

 

 

(530

)

 

530

 

 

2.75

 

Options exercised

 

 

 

 

(901

)

 

0.64

 

Options canceled

 

 

175

 

 

(175

)

 

1.07

 

 

 



 



 

 

 

 

Outstanding — June 30, 2007

 

 

4,504

 

 

4,626

 

 

4.57

 

 

 



 



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Shares authorized

 

 

2,137

 

 

 

 

 

Termination of remaining shares available for grant under the 1997 Option Plan and other non-plan options

 

 

(1,192

)

 

 

 

 

Options granted (weighted average fair value of $7.00 per share)

 

 

(3,518

)

 

3,518

 

 

11.56

 

Options exercised

 

 

 

 

(597

)

 

0.62

 

Options canceled/forfeited

 

 

372

 

 

(372

)

 

7.47

 

Restricted stock awards (See note 11)

 

 

(101

)

 

 

 

 

 

 



 



 

 

 

 

Outstanding — June 30, 2008

 

 

2,202

 

 

7,175

 

 

8.18

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Shares authorized

 

 

2,190

 

 

 

 

 

Cancelled shares under the 1997 Option Plan

 

 

(65

)

 

 

 

 

Options granted (weighted average fair value of $5.86 per share)

 

 

(4,327

)

 

4,327

 

 

4.87

 

Options exercised

 

 

 

 

(395

)

 

1.55

 

Options repurchased

 

 

1

 

 

 

 

 

Options canceled/forfeited

 

 

3,851

 

 

(3,851

)

 

12.66

 

Restricted stock awards (See note 11)

 

 

(562

)

 

 

 

 

Restricted stock canceled

 

 

69

 

 

 

 

 

 

 



 



 



 

Outstanding — June 30, 2009

 

 

3,359

 

 

7,256

 

$

4.19

 

 

 



 



 



 

Options exercisable at June 30, 2009

 

 

 

 

 

2,054

 

$

2.27

 

 

 

 

 

 



 



 

Vested and expected to vest at June 30, 2009

 

 

 

 

 

5,861

 

$

4.03

 

 

 

 

 

 



 



 

          The total intrinsic value for options exercised in the years ended June 30, 2009, 2008 and 2007 was $1.5 million, $4.1 million, $7.6 million, respectively, representing the difference between the estimated fair values of the Company’s common stock underlying these options at the dates of exercise and the exercise prices paid. There were 1,192,000 unissued options that expired under the 1997 Option Plan upon the termination of that plan. These unissued, expired options have been included in the option activity for the year ended June 30, 2008. There were 65,000 cancelled options that expired under the 1997 Plan due to the termination of that plan. These cancelled, expired options have been included in the option activity for the year ended June 30, 2009.

     The following table summarizes information about outstanding and exercisable options at June 30, 2009:

59



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

As of June 30, 2009

 

 

 


 

Exercise
Prices

 

Options
Outstanding

 

Weighted
Average
Remaining
Contractual
Life (Years)

 

Weighted
Average
Exercise
Price

 

Aggregate
Intrinsic
Value

 




 


 


 


 

 

 

 

 

(Amounts in thousands, except per share data)

 

 

 

$0.10 - 0.40

 

 

773

 

 

5.26

 

 

 

$

0.31

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

$0.80 - 1.00

 

 

449

 

 

6.41

 

 

 

 

0.88

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

$2.50 - 3.20

 

 

593

 

 

7.14

 

 

 

 

3.12

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

$3.50 - 4.56

 

 

464

 

 

8.99

 

 

 

 

3.93

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

$4.82

 

 

3,166

 

 

6.62

 

 

 

 

4.82

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

$4.93 - 5.08

 

 

814

 

 

8.68

 

 

 

 

4.96

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

$5.25 – 6.87

 

 

800

 

 

8.97

 

 

 

 

5.60

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

$11.30 – 11.40

 

 

171

 

 

7.85

 

 

 

 

11.36

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

$12.55 – 13.73

 

 

22

 

 

8.18

 

 

 

 

13.05

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

$15.41

 

 

4

 

 

8.37

 

 

 

 

15.41

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total Outstanding

 

 

7,256

 

 

7.18

 

 

 

$

4.19

 

 

 

$

28,388

 

 

 

 

 


 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Exercisable

 

 

2,054

 

 

6.44

 

 

 

 

2.27

 

 

 

 

12,122

 

 

Vested and expected to vest

 

 

5,861

 

 

7.09

 

 

 

$

4.03

 

 

 

$

23,861

 

 

10. EMPLOYEE STOCK PURCHASE PLAN

          The Company has an Employee Stock Purchase Plan (the “ESPP”), under which eligible employees can purchase shares of the Company’s common stock at a discount through payroll deductions. The ESPP consists of six-month offering periods commencing on May 1 st and November 1 st , each year. Employees purchase shares in the purchase period at 90% of the market value of the Company’s common stock at either the beginning of the offering period or the end of the offering period, whichever price is lower.

          On February 3, 2009 and February 6, 2008, pursuant to the automatic increase provisions of the ESPP, the Company’s Board of Directors approved increases to the number of shares authorized and reserved for issuance under the ESPP by 438,000 shares and 427,000 shares, respectively, pursuant to the terms of that plan. The Company issued, 571,000 shares and 117,000 shares under the ESPP in fiscal 2009 and 2008, respectively, at weighted average price per share of $4.19 and $4.17 in fiscal 2009 and 2008, respectively.

          As of June 30, 2009, 677,000 shares had been reserved for future issuance under the ESPP.

11. RESTRICTED STOCK AWARDS

          Under the 2007 Plan, during the year ended June 30, 2009, the Company issued restricted stock awards to non-employee directors electing to receive them in lieu of an annual cash retainer. In addition, restricted stock units can be issued under the 2007 Plan to eligible employees, and generally vest 25% at one year or 50% at two years from the date of grant and 25% annually thereafter.

          Restricted stock award and restricted stock unit activity for the year ended June 30, 2009 is as follows (in thousands):

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Shares

 

Weighted-
Average
Remaining
Contractual Life
(Years)

 

Aggregate
Intrinsic
Value

 

 

 


 


 


 

Outstanding — July 1, 2008

 

 

70

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Awarded

 

 

562

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Released

 

 

(56

)

 

 

 

 

 

 

Forfeited

 

 

(69

)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Outstanding — June 30, 2009

 

 

507

 

 

1.87

 

$

4,053

 

 

 



 



 



 

Vested and expected to vest at June 30, 2009

 

 

366

 

 

1.77

 

$

2,927

 

 

 



 



 



 

60


          Restricted stock award and restricted stock unit activity for the year ended June 30, 2008 is as follows (in thousands):

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Shares

 

Weighted-
Average
Remaining
Contractual Life
(Years)

 

Aggregate
Intrinsic
Value

 

 

 


 


 


 

Outstanding — July 1, 2007

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Awarded

 

 

101

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Released

 

 

(31

)

 

 

 

 

 

 

Forfeited

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Outstanding — June 30, 2008

 

 

70

 

 

2.42

 

$

309

 

 

 



 



 



 

Vested and expected to vest at June 30, 2009

 

 

51

 

 

2.35

 

$

228

 

 

 



 



 



 

          The weighted-average grant-date fair value of restricted stock awards granted during fiscal 2009, 2008 and 2007 was $3.0 million, $0.5 million and $0, respectively. As of June 30, 2009, total unrecognized compensation cost related to restricted stock units granted to employees and directors was $1.8 million, net of estimated forfeitures of $0.7 million. The Company expects to recognize the expense related to restricted stock units on a straight-line basis over a weighted-average vesting period of approximately 3 years.

12. LITIGATION, COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES

 

 

 

Litigation — The Company was a party to the following lawsuits during the year ended June 30, 2009:

 

 

 

Mitel Litigation.

               Mitel Patent Litigation. On June 27, 2007, a lawsuit was filed against the Company by Mitel Networks Corporation in the United States District Court for the Eastern District of Texas. Mitel alleged that the Company infringed four of its U.S. patents: U.S. Patent No. 5,940,834, entitled “Automatic Web Page Generator,” U.S. Patent No. 5,703,942 entitled “Portable Telephone User Profiles Using Central Computer,” U.S. Patent No. 5,541,983 entitled “Automatic Telephone Feature Selector” and U.S. Patent No. 5,657,446 entitled “Local Area Communications Server.” On August 21, 2007, Mitel filed an amended complaint, which alleges that the Company infringed two additional U.S. patents held by Mitel: U.S. Patent No. 5,007,080, entitled “Communications System Supporting Remote Operations,” and U.S. Patent No. 5,657,377, entitled “Portable Telephone User Profiles.” The lawsuit included claims that relate to components or features that are material to the Company’s products. In relation to its claims under each patent, Mitel sought a permanent injunction against infringement, attorney’s fees and compensatory damages. On July 31, 2007, the Company filed counterclaims in the Eastern District of Texas. In addition to denying all of Mitel’s claims of patent infringement, the counterclaims allege that Mitel’s IP phone systems, including the Mitel 3300 IP Communications Platform, infringed ShoreTel’s U.S. Patent No. 7,167,486 B2 entitled “Voice Traffic Through a Firewall.”

     Mitel Trade Libel Litigation. On July 31, 2007 the Company filed a lawsuit against Mitel Networks Corporation in Ontario Superior Court in Canada for making false or misleading statements about the Company. The Company filed claims for approximately $11 million in damages and an injunction against Mitel. In April 2008, the Company expanded the trade libel complaint against Mitel and increased the damages claim to $20 million.

          On April 24, 2009, the Company and Mitel entered into a confidential definitive agreement to settle the litigation between them. Under the terms of the agreement, the parties agreed to dismiss the patent litigation and trade libel litigation. Both matters were dismissed with prejudice on May 8, 2009. The agreement calls for the Company to make payments totaling $5.0 million over four years. The present value of the payments was calculated to be $4.6 million, of which $0.5 million was estimated to be the value of the future right to use the technology covered by such patents and was recorded as a long term prepaid royalty asset that will be amortized to cost of revenue over approximately six years, which is the life of the patents. The remaining amount of $4.1 million was recorded as litigation settlement cost in the Company’s consolidated statements of operations for the year ended June 30, 2009.

          U.S. Federal Court Class Action Litigation . On January 16, 2008, a purported stockholder class action lawsuit captioned Watkins v. ShoreTel, Inc., et al., was filed in the United States District Court for the Northern District of California against the Company, certain of its officers and directors, and the underwriters of the Company’s initial public offering. A second purported class action alleging the same claims was filed on January 29, 2008 and the lawsuits were consolidated. A second consolidated amended class action complaint was subsequently filed on March 2, 2009. The consolidated action is purportedly brought on behalf of those who purchased the Company’s common stock pursuant to the initial public offering on July 3, 2007, purports to allege claims for violations of the federal securities laws, and seeks unspecified compensatory damages and other relief. Management believes that the Company has meritorious defenses to these claims and intends to defend the litigation vigorously. It is not possible for the Company to quantify the extent of the potential liability, if any. As such, no liability for any potential loss has been accrued as of June 30, 2009.

          California State Court Derivative Action . On January 30, 2008, a purported shareholder derivative lawsuit captioned Berkovitz v. Combs, et al., was filed in the Superior Court of the State of California, County of Santa Clara, against the Company (as a nominal defendant), its directors and certain officers. The complaint purports to allege claims for breach of fiduciary duty and other claims and seeks unspecified compensatory damages and other relief based on essentially the same allegations as the class action

61


litigation. On May 6, 2008, the parties stipulated to, and the Court entered an order for, a temporary standstill of the case. It is not possible for the Company to quantify the extent of the potential liability, if any. As such, no liability for any potential loss has been accrued as of June 30, 2009.

          The Company could become involved in litigation from time to time relating to claims arising out of the ordinary course of business or otherwise. Any litigation, regardless of outcome, is costly and time-consuming, can divert the attention of management and key personnel from business operations and deter distributors from selling the Company’s products and dissuade potential customers from purchasing the Company’s products.

                Leases — The Company leases its facilities under non-cancelable operating leases which expire at various times through 2015. The leases provide for the lessee to pay all cost of utilities, insurance, and taxes. On July 16, 2009, the Company entered into an amendment of the lease for the corporate headquarters. The existing lease was scheduled to expire on October 31, 2009 and the amendment extends the term of the existing lease to September 30, 2014. The Company has included in the summary below, the incremental obligation of $4.8 million to the total lease commitment.

               Future minimum lease payments under the non-cancelable leases as of June 30, 2009, are as follows (in thousands):

 

 

 

 

 

Years Ending June 30,

 

 

 

 


 

 

 

 

2010

 

$

1,151

 

2011

 

 

1,357

 

2012

 

 

1,321

 

2013

 

 

1,169

 

2014

 

 

1,112

 

2015

 

 

280

 

 

 



 

Total

 

$

6,390

 

 

 



 

          Lease obligations for the Company’s foreign offices are denominated in foreign currencies, which were converted herein to U.S. dollars at the interbank exchange rate on June 30, 2009.

          Rent expense for the years ended June 30, 2009, 2008, and 2007, was $1.9 million, $1.6 million, and $0.7 million, respectively.

           Purchase commitments — As of June 30, 2009, the Company had purchase commitments with contract manufacturers for inventory and with technology firms for usage of software licenses totaling approximately $21.2 million.

           Indemnification — Under the indemnification provisions of the Company’s customer agreements, the Company agrees to indemnify and defend its customers against infringement of any patent, trademark, or copyright of any country or the misappropriation of any trade secret, arising from the customers’ legal use of the Company’s services. The exposure to the Company under these indemnification provisions is generally limited to the total amount paid by the customers under pertinent agreements. However, certain indemnification provisions potentially expose the company to losses in excess of the aggregate amount received from the customer. To date, there have been no claims against the Company or its customers pertaining to such indemnification provisions and no amounts have been recorded.

          The Company also has entered into customary indemnification agreements with each of its officers and directors. The Company also has indemnification obligations to the underwriters of its initial public offering pursuant to the underwriting agreement executed in connection with that offering. As a result, the Company may have indemnification obligations to its officers, directors and underwriters in connection with the above-referenced securities-related litigation.

13. EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLAN

          The Company adopted a defined contribution retirement plan which has been determined by the Internal Revenue Service (“IRS”) to be qualified as a 401(k) plan (“the Plan”). The Plan covers substantially all employees. The Plan provides for voluntary tax deferred contributions of 1 — 20% of gross compensation, subject to certain IRS limitations. Based on approval by the Board of Directors, the Company may make matching contributions to the Plan. No matching contributions have been made since inception of the Plan.

14. SEGMENT INFORMATION

          SFAS No. 131 (SFAS 131), Disclosures About Segments of an Enterprise and Related Information , established standards for reporting information about operating segments. Operating segments are defined as components of an enterprise for which separate financial information is available and evaluated regularly by the chief operating decision-maker, or decision-making group, in deciding how to allocate resources and in assessing performance. The Company is organized as, and operates in, one reportable segment: the development and sale of IP voice communication systems. The Company’s chief operating decision-maker is its Chief Executive Officer. The Company’s Chief Executive Officer reviews financial information presented on a consolidated basis for

62


purposes of evaluating financial performance and allocating resources, accompanied by information about revenue by geographic regions. The Company’s assets are primarily located in the United States of America and not allocated to any specific region and it does not measure the performance of its geographic regions based upon on asset-based metrics. Therefore, geographic information is presented only for revenue. Revenue by geographic region is based on the ship to address on the customer order.

          The following presents total revenue by geographic region (in thousands):

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year Ended June 30,

 

 

 


 

 

 

2009

 

2008

 

2007

 

 

 


 


 


 

United States of America

 

$

125,321

 

$

120,170

 

$

94,156

 

International

 

 

9,501

 

 

8,559

 

 

3,671

 

 

 



 



 



 

Total

 

$

134,822

 

$

128,729

 

$

97,827

 

 

 



 



 



 

15. RESTRUCTURING COSTS

          In the third quarter of fiscal 2009, the Company announced a restructuring plan which is substantially complete. The remaining obligations under this plan relate primarily to benefit obligations that are expected to be satisfied by the end of the first half of fiscal 2010. The restructuring plan reduced the Company’s worldwide workforce by approximately nine percent. As a result of the reduction in headcount, the Company recorded restructuring and other related charges, consisting of employee related termination costs in the year ended June 30, 2009.

          The Company accounts for restructuring costs in accordance with SFAS No. 146, Accounting for Costs Associated with Exit of Disposal Activities . The following table sets forth the charges that are included in the operating expenses on the Company’s Consolidated Statement of Operations for the year ended June 30, 2009 (in thousands):

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

June 30,
2008

 

Year ended June 30, 2009

 

June 30,
2009

 

 

 


 


 


 

 

 

Restructuring
Reserves

 

Add Charges

 

Deduct Cash
Payments

 

Non-Cash
Expense

 

Restructuring
Reserves

 

 

 


 


 


 


 


 

Workforce reduction

 

$

 

$

416

 

$

389

 

$

 

$

27

 

16. QUARTERLY FINANCIAL DATA (Unaudited)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Three Months Ended

 

 

 


 

 

 

Jun. 30,
2009

 

Mar. 31,
2009

 

Dec. 31,
2008

 

Sep. 30,
2008

 

Jun. 30,
2008

 

Mar. 31,
2008

 

Dec. 31,
2007

 

Sep. 30,
2007

 

 

 


 


 


 


 


 


 


 


 

 

 

(In thousands, except per share amounts)

 

 

Total revenue

 

$

32,390

 

$

31,237

 

$

35,335

 

$

35,860

 

$

34,704

 

$

31,489

 

$

30,561

 

$

31,975

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Gross profit

 

 

20,519

 

 

19,932

 

 

22,304

 

 

22,960

 

 

21,697

 

 

19,518

 

 

19,657

 

 

20,412

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net income (loss)

 

 

(688

)

 

(7,003

)

 

(1,945

)

 

(2,160

)

 

(47

)

 

(1,714

)

 

1,837

 

 

2,557

 

Basic net income (loss) per share available to common stockholders

 

$

(0.02

)

$

(0.16

)

$

(0.04

)

$

(0.05

)

$

 

 

(0.04

)

$

0.04

 

$

0.06

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diluted net income (loss) per share available to common stockholder

 

$

(0.02

)

$

(0.16

)

$

(0.04

)

$

(0.05

)

$

 

$

(0.04

)

$

0.04

 

$

0.06

 

63



 

 

I TEM 9.

CHANGES IN AND DISAGREEMENTS WITH ACCOUNTANTS ON ACCOUNTING AND FINANCIAL DISCLOSURE

          None.

 

 

I TEM 9A.

CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES

Evaluation of Disclosure Controls and Procedures

          Under the supervision and with the participation of our management, including our Chief Executive Officer (CEO) and our Chief Financial Officer (CFO), we conducted an evaluation of our disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (Exchange Act), as of the end of the period covered by this Annual Report on Form 10-K. Based upon that evaluation, our CEO and our CFO have concluded that the design and operation of our disclosure controls and procedures were effective to ensure that information required to be disclosed by us in reports that we file or submit under the Exchange Act (i) is recorded, processed, summarized and reported within the time periods specified in Securities and Exchange Commission rules and forms and (ii) is accumulated and communicated to our management, including our CEO and CFO, as appropriate to allow timely decisions regarding required disclosure.

Changes in Internal Control over Financial Reporting

          As required by Rule 13a-15(d) of the Exchange Act, our management, including our Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, conducted an evaluation of our “internal control over financial reporting” as defined in Exchange Act Rule 13a-15(f) to determine whether any changes in our internal control over financial reporting occurred during the fourth quarter of fiscal 2009 that materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, our internal control over financial reporting. Based on that evaluation, there have been no such changes during the fourth quarter of fiscal 2009.

Management’s Report on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting

          Our management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934). Our internal control over financial reporting is designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.

          Under the supervision and with the participation of our management, including our principal executive officer and principal financial officer, we conducted an evaluation of the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting based on the framework set forth in Internal Control — Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. Based on our evaluation under the framework set forth in Internal Control — Integrated Framework, our management concluded that our internal control over financial reporting was effective as of June 30, 2009.

          The effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting as of June 30, 2009 has been audited by Deloitte & Touche LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm, as stated in its report which appears below.

Inherent Limitations on Effectiveness of Controls

          Our management, including our CEO and CFO, does not expect that our disclosure controls and procedures or our internal controls will prevent all errors and all fraud. A control system, no matter how well conceived and operated, can provide only reasonable, not absolute, assurance that the objectives of the control system are met. Further, the design of a control system must reflect the fact that there are resource constraints, and the benefits of controls must be considered relative to their costs. Our disclosure controls and procedures and our internal controls over financial reporting have been designed to provide reasonable assurance of achieving their objectives. Because of the inherent limitations in all control systems, no evaluation of controls can provide absolute assurance that all control issues and instances of fraud, if any, have been detected.

64


REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

          To the Board of Directors and Stockholders of ShoreTel, Inc.:

          We have audited the internal control over financial reporting of ShoreTel, Inc. and subsidiaries (collectively, the “Company”) as of June 30, 2009, based on criteria established in Internal Control — Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. The Company’s management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Management’s Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting based on our audit.

          We conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk, and performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.

          A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed by, or under the supervision of, the company’s principal executive and principal financial officers, or persons performing similar functions, and effected by the company’s board of directors, management, and other personnel to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

          Because of the inherent limitations of internal control over financial reporting, including the possibility of collusion or improper management override of controls, material misstatements due to error or fraud may not be prevented or detected on a timely basis. Also, projections of any evaluation of the effectiveness of the internal control over financial reporting to future periods are subject to the risk that the controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

          In our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of June 30, 2009, based on the criteria established in Internal Control — Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission.

          We have also audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the consolidated financial statements as of and for the year ended June 30, 2009 of the Company and our report dated September 10, 2009, expressed an unqualified opinion on those financial statements.

/s/ DELOITTE & TOUCHE LLP

San Jose, California
September 10, 2009

65



 

 

I TEM 9B.

OTHER INFORMATION

          None.

P ART III

 

 

I TEM 10.

DIRECTORS AND EXECUTIVE OFFICERS OF THE REGISTRANT AND CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

          The information required by this item is incorporated by reference to our definitive Proxy Statement for the 2009 Annual Meeting of Stockholders to be filed with the SEC within 120 days after the end of our fiscal year ended June 30, 2009.

 

 

I TEM 11.

EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION

          The information required by this item is incorporated by reference to our definitive Proxy Statement for the 2009 Annual Meeting of Stockholders to be filed with the SEC within 120 days after the end of our fiscal year ended June 30, 2009.

 

 

I TEM 12.

SECURITY OWNERSHIP OF CERTAIN BENEFICIAL OWNERS AND MANAGEMENT AND RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS

          The information required by this item is incorporated by reference to our definitive Proxy Statement for the 2009 Annual Meeting of Stockholders to be filed with the SEC within 120 days after the end of our fiscal year ended June 30, 2009.

 

 

I TEM 13.

CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED TRANSACTIONS, DIRECTOR INDEPENDENCE

          The information required by this item is incorporated by reference to our definitive Proxy Statement for the 2009 Annual Meeting of Stockholders to be filed with the SEC within 120 days after the end of our fiscal year ended June 30, 2009.

 

 

I TEM 14.

PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTING FEES AND SERVICES

          The information required by this item is incorporated by reference to our definitive Proxy Statement for the 2009 Annual Meeting of Stockholders to be filed with the SEC within 120 days after the end of our fiscal year ended June 30, 2009.

P ART IV

 

 

I TEM 15.

EXHIBITS AND FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULES.

          (a)  (1) Financial Statements  — See Index to Financial Statements at Page 40 of this Report.

          (2)  Financial Statement Schedule  — Financial statement schedules have been omitted because the required information is not present or not present in amounts sufficient to require submission of the schedule, or because the information required is included in the financial statements or the notes to those financial statements.

          (3)  Exhibits  — See Exhibit Index at page 69 of this Report.

66


S IGNATURES

          Pursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the registrant has duly caused this Annual Report on Form 10-K to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, on this 10th day of September, 2009.

 

 

 

 

ShoreTel, Inc.

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ MICHAEL E. HEALY

 

 


 

 

Michael E. Healy

 

 

Chief Financial Officer

POWER OF ATTORNEY

          KNOW ALL THESE, PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS, that each person whose signature appears below constitutes and appoints John W. Combs, Ava M. Hahn and Michael E. Healy, and each of them, his attorneys-in-fact, each with full power of substitution, for him in any and all capacities, to sign any and all amendments to this Annual Report on Form 10-K, and to file the same, with exhibits thereto and other documents in connection therewith, with the Securities and Exchange Commission, hereby ratifying and confirming all that each said attorneys-in-fact or his substitute or substitutes, may do or cause to be done by virtue hereof.

          Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, this Annual Report on Form 10-K has been signed below by the following persons on behalf of the registrant and in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Name

 

Title

 

Date


 


 


 

 

 

 

 

 

/s/    JOHN W. COMBS

 

Chairman, President and
Chief Executive Officer
(Principal Executive Officer)

 

September 10, 2009

 


 

 

 

 

John W. Combs

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

/s/     MICHAEL E. HEALY

 

Chief Financial Officer
(Principal Financial Officer and
Principal Accounting Officer)

 

September 10, 2009

 


 

 

 

 

Michael E. Healy

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

/s/     EDWIN J. BASART

 

Director

 

September 10, 2009

 


 

 

 

 

 

Edwin J. Basart

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

/s/     MARK F. BREGMAN

 

Director

 

September 10, 2009

 


 

 

 

 

 

Mark F. Bregman

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

/s/     GARY J. DAICHENDT

 

Director

 

September 10, 2009

 


 

 

 

 

 

Gary J. Daichendt

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

/s/     KENNETH DENMAN

 

Director

 

September 10, 2009

 


 

 

 

 

 

Kenneth Denman

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

/s/     MICHAEL GREGORIE

 

Director

 

September 10, 2009

 


 

 

 

 

 

Michael Gregorie

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

/s/     CHARLES D. KISSNER

 

Director

 

September 10, 2009

 


 

 

 

 

 

Charles D. Kissner

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

/s/     EDWARD F. THOMPSON

 

Director

 

September 10, 2009

 


 

 

 

 

 

Edward F. Thompson

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


 

 

 

 

 

67


INDEX TO FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULES

FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULE

Schedule II — Valuation and Qualifying Accounts and Reserves

          All required schedules associated with Valuation and Qualifying Accounts and Reserves are omitted because they are not required, are not applicable or the information is included in the consolidated financial statements or notes thereto.

68


EXHIBIT INDEX

 

 

 

 

Exhibit
Number

 

Exhibit Title


 


3.1

(1)

 

Third Restated Certificate of Incorporation of the Registrant

 

 

 

 

3.2

(1)

 

Second Amended and Restated Bylaws of the Registrant.

 

 

 

 

4.1

(1)

 

Form of Registrant’s Common Stock certificate.

 

 

 

 

4.2

(1)

 

Seventh Amended and Restated Rights Agreement dated October 20, 2004 by and among the Registrant and certain of its equity holders.

 

 

 

 

10.1

(1)

 

Form of Indemnity Agreement between the Registrant and each of its directors and executive officers.

 

 

 

 

10.2

(1) +

 

1997 Stock Option Plan and forms of stock option agreement and stock option exercise agreement.

 

 

 

 

10.3

(1) +

 

2007 Equity Incentive Plan and forms of stock option agreement and stock option exercise agreement.

 

 

 

 

10.4

(2)+

 

2007 Employee Stock Purchase Plan.

 

 

 

 

10.5

(4)+

 

ShoreTel FY 2009 Executive Bonus Plan.

 

 

 

 

10.6

(1) +

 

Offer Letter, dated as of September 8, 2005, by the Registrant and Joseph A. Vitalone.

 

 

 

 

10.7

(1) +

 

Offer Letter, dated as of April 13, 2005, by the Registrant and Walter Weisner.

 

 

 

 

10.8

(1)+

 

Offer Letter, dated April 22, 2007, by the Registrant and Michael E. Healy.

 

 

 

 

10.9

(3)+

 

Employment Agreement, dated as of January 23, 2008, between the Registrant and Donald Girskis.

 

 

 

 

10.10(1)

 

Manufacturing Services Agreement, dated October 28, 2005, between Registrant and Jabil Circuit, Inc.

 

 

 

 

10.11 

 

Office Lease Oakmead West, dated April 20, 2007, between Registrant and Carr NP Properties, L.L.C.(1), and Amendment No. 1 thereto.

 

 

 

 

10.12(5)+

 

Non-employee director compensation guidelines.

 

 

 

 

10.13(6)+

 

Form of Retention Incentive Agreement for the Chief Executive Officer, Form of Retention Agreement for the Chief Financial Officer, Form of Retention Agreement for the Other Executive Officers.

 

 

 

 

10.14(7)

 

Restructuring Plan.

 

 

 

 

21

 

 

Subsidiaries.

 

 

 

 

23.1

 

 

Consent of Deloitte & Touche LLP, independent registered public accounting firm.

 

 

 

 

24.1

 

 

Power of Attorney (included on the signature page hereto).

 

 

 

 

31.1

 

 

Rule 13a-14(a)/15d-14(a) Certification of Chief Executive Officer.

 

 

 

 

31.2

 

 

Rule 13a-14(a)/15d-14(a) Certification of Chief Financial Officer.

 

 

 

 

32.1

 

 

Section 1350 Certification of Chief Executive Officer.

 

 

 

 

32.2

 

 

Section 1350 Certification of Chief Financial Officer.


 

 


(1)

Incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1 filed on February 12, 2007.

 

 

(2)

Incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended June 30, 2007 filed on September 27, 2007.

 

 

(3)

Incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended March 31, 2008 filed on May 13, 2008.

 

 

(4)

Incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s Annual Report of Form 10-K for the year ended June 30, 2008 filed on September 12, 2008.

 

 

(5)

Incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s Form 8-K filed on February 12, 2008.

 

 

(6)

Incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s Form 8-K filed on February 9, 2009.

69



 

 

+

Management Compensatory Plan or Arrangement

 

 

Confidential treatment has been granted with respect to selected portions of this agreement has been filed with the Commission.

          (b) Financial Statement Schedules.

          All schedules have been omitted because they are either inapplicable or the required information has been given in the consolidated financial statements or the notes thereto.

70


Exhibit 10.11

 

FIRST AMENDMENT TO LEASE

 

THIS FIRST AMENDMENT TO LEASE (this " Amendment ") is dated for reference purposes only as of June 18, 2009, by and between CARR NP PROPERTIES, L.L.C. , a Delaware limited liability company (" Landlord "), and SHORETEL, INC. , a Delaware corporation (" Tenant ").

RECITALS

A.        Landlord and Tenant are parties to that certain Office Lease dated as of April 20, 2007 (the " Existing Lease "), pursuant to which Landlord leases to Tenant certain premises, containing approximately 63,781 rentable square feet of space, comprising the entirety of the building located at 960 Stewart Drive, Sunnyvale, California (the " Premises "). The Existing Lease is scheduled to expire on October 31, 2009.

B.        Landlord and Tenant now desire to extend the Lease Term to expire on September 30, 2014, and make certain other amendments to the Existing Lease, all subject to, and on the basis of, the terms, covenants and conditions hereinafter set forth. The Existing Lease, as amended by this Amendment, is sometimes referred to herein as the " Lease ."

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the foregoing and the agreements of Landlord and Tenant herein contained and other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, Landlord and Tenant hereby agree as follows:

1.          Use of Defined Terms; Recitals; Effective Date.

1.1                   Definitions; Recitals. All capitalized terms used and not defined herein shall have the defined meanings ascribed to them in the Existing Lease. The provisions of the Recitals above are fully incorporated herein by this reference.

1.2                    Effective Date. Unless otherwise specifically provided herein, all provisions of this Amendment shall be effective as of May 1, 2009 (the " Effective Date ").

2.          Term. The Lease Term is hereby extended for a period of fifty-nine (59) months (the " Extension Term "), commencing on November 1, 2009 (the " Extension Term Commencement Date "), and expiring on September 30, 2014 (which, for all purposes under the Lease, shall hereinafter be the " Lease Expiration Date "), unless earlier terminated pursuant to the terms and conditions of the Lease.

 

 

1

 

 


3.          Amendments to Lease . Commencing on the Effective Date, the Existing Lease shall be amended as follows:

3.1                   Monthly Base Rent. Tenant shall pay Base Rent in accordance with the following:



Period During
Lease Term



Annual
Base Rent


Monthly
Installment
of Base Rent

Monthly Base
Rent
per Rentable
Square Foot

May 1, 2009 – September 30, 2009

N/A

$0.00

$0.00

October 1, 2009 – September 30, 2010

$994,983.60

$82,915.30

$1.30

October 1, 2010 – September 30, 2011

$1,024,833.11

$85,402.76

$1.34

October 1, 2011 – September 30, 2012

$1,055,578.10

$87,964.84

$1.38

October 1, 2012 – September 30, 2013

$1,087,245.44

$90,603.79

$1.42

October 1, 2013 – September 30, 2014

$1,119,862.81

$93,321.90

$1.46

The parties acknowledge that, as of the Effective Date, Tenant has a credit against Base Rent equal to Three Hundred Five Thousand Eight Hundred Nineteen and 18/100 Dollars ($305,819.18) (" Base Rent Credit "), which amount was previously paid by Tenant as Base Rent and Tenant's Share of Direct Expenses for the months of May and June 2009. Landlord shall apply the Base Rent Credit against the Base Rent payments for the months of October, November and December 2009 and January 2010, until the Base Rent Credit has been exhausted.

3.2                    Direct Expenses. During the period commencing May 1, 2009 and ending September 30, 2009, Tenant's obligation to pay Tenant's Share of Direct Expenses pursuant to Section 4.1 of the Existing Lease shall be abated. Nothing contained herein shall affect Tenant's continuing obligation to pay for all janitorial services and other utilities charges relating to the Premises pursuant to Article 6 of the Existing Lease.

3.3                    Security Deposit. As of the Effective Date, provided that Tenant is not then in default in the performance of any of its covenants under the Lease, the Security Deposit shall be reduced to Ninety-Three Thousand Three Hundred Twenty-One and 90/100 Dollars ($93,321.90). Accordingly, within thirty (30) days following the Effective Date, Landlord shall refund to Tenant an amount equal to Twenty-Four Thousand Six Hundred Seventy-Two and 95/100 Dollars ($24,672.95).

 

 

2

 

 


 

 

3.4

Repairs .

(a)                    The parties acknowledge that the reference to " Section 4.2.3(o) " in Section 4.2.3 and Section 7.1.4 of the Existing Lease was a typographical error and should have referred to Section 4.2.3(p) of the Existing Lease; and that such correction shall be effective as of the effective date of the Existing Lease.

(b)                    Notwithstanding the provisions of Section 7.1.2 or Section 7.1.4 of the Existing Lease, if any repairs or replacements are required to be performed to the Base Building Systems (as defined in Section 4.1(c) below) prior to May 1, 2010 (i.e., one (1) year following the Effective Date), then, provided that such repairs are not necessitated by the negligence or willful misconduct of Tenant or any Tenant Parties, or by Tenant's failure to provide normal service to such Base Building Systems as required by the Existing Lease (e.g., HVAC preventive maintenance contracts), then Landlord shall, at no cost to Tenant, make such repairs or replacements. Without limiting the provisions of Section 7.1.2 of the Existing Lease, after the one (1) year warranty period above, Tenant shall have the benefit of all warranties available to Landlord regarding the Building Systems for which Tenant is responsible pursuant to Section 7.1 of the Existing Lease.

(c)                    Without limiting Landlord's obligations set forth in Section 3.4(b) above or Section 4.1 below, Landlord and Tenant acknowledge that, prior to the date of this Amendment, Tenant engaged an HVAC contractor to complete an independent inspection of the existing HVAC system serving the Premises, and that such inspection established that "HVAC Unit No. 3" has a useful life of less than five (5) years. Accordingly, following the Effective Date, Landlord shall promptly make such repairs and replacements as may be necessary to keep "HVAC Unit No. 3" in good working condition and repair, and, at such time that, consistent with reasonable and prudent industry practices, replacement of such HVAC Unit is required, Landlord shall promptly replace "HVAC Unit No. 3" at no cost to Tenant.

3.5                Permitted Alterations . The parties acknowledge and agree that, following the Effective Date, Tenant intends to perform certain Alterations to the Premises, which Alterations shall be performed subject to, and in accordance with, the terms and conditions contained in Article 8 of the Existing Lease, except as follows:

(a)                    Notwithstanding the provisions of Section 8.2 of the Existing Lease, Tenant reserves the right to retain its own architectural/interior design firm and general contractor and oversee the design and construction of the Alterations. Tenant shall provide Landlord with schematic plans depicting Tenant's proposed Alterations for Landlord's approval, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld. Tenant's Alterations may be constructed in phases, some prior to the Extension Term Commencement Date and others thereafter.

(b)                    Subject to Landlord's approval of Tenant's improvement plans, the Alterations will be completed in accordance with all Applicable Requirements by Tenant's retained interior design firm and general contractor, who shall be licensed in the State of

 

 

3

 

 


California. Such work may commence upon completion and execution of all documentation and receipt of all approvals and/or permits required for the construction. Landlord will not charge any fee for review, approval and oversight of Tenant’s plans and specifications in connection with such Alterations.

(c)                    Notwithstanding the provisions of Section 8.5 of the Existing Lease, upon the expiration or any early termination of the Lease, Tenant shall have no obligation to remove any of the existing improvements or the Alterations shown on the preliminary plan attached hereto as Exhibit A , except for Tenant's personal property.

(d)                    Notwithstanding the provisions of Section 24.1 of the Existing Lease or Section 4.2 below, if Tenant's Alterations give rise to governmentally-required changes to the structural portions of the Building because of the Building's non-compliance as of the Effective Date (based on the current interpretation of the Applicable Requirements by applicable governmental or quasi-governmental authorities as of the Effective Date), then such changes to the structural portions of the Building shall be Landlord's Repair Obligations pursuant to Section 7.2.1 of the Existing Lease, and Tenant shall pay Landlord the cost of such changes as an Included Capital Item. The exclusion from Operating Expenses described in Section 4.2.3(p) of the Existing Lease shall not be applicable to Landlord's changes to the Building pursuant this Section.

 

3.6

Alterations Allowance .

(a)                    Upon Tenant's written request and satisfaction of the conditions set forth in Section 3.6(b) below, Landlord will contribute to the cost of any interior office and lab improvements to the Premises, cabling and signage (collectively, " Permitted Alterations ") that Tenant hereafter performs in or to the Premises to the extent of the lesser of (i) One Million Fifty-Two Thousand Three Hundred Eighty-Six and 50/100 Dollars ($1,052,386.50) (calculated on the basis of $16.50 per rentable square foot in the Premises) or (ii) the actual cost of the Permitted Alterations (the lesser of the previously-described amounts being hereinafter referred to as the " Alterations Allowance "). The Alterations Allowance may only be applied to the payment or reimbursement of documented "hard costs" of labor and materials and "soft costs" relating to the Permitted Alterations. Tenant shall pay for all costs of Permitted Alterations in excess of the Alterations Allowance; provided, however, that, in addition to the Alterations Allowance, Landlord shall provide Tenant a "test fit" allowance not to exceed $6,378.10 towards the cost of preparing preliminary space plans and interior design plans relating to the Permitted Alterations (such amount to be reimbursed by Landlord to Tenant within thirty (30) days of reasonably detailed invoices therefor).

(b)                    Provided that this Lease is then in full force and effect, Landlord shall pay the Alterations Allowance to Tenant within thirty (30) days after satisfaction of each of the following conditions: (i) Tenant's delivery to Landlord of invoices and other reasonably satisfactory evidence of the cost of the Permitted Alterations; (ii) with respect to any portion of the Permitted Alterations requiring a building permit, Tenant's delivery to Landlord of a certificate issued by Tenant's architect certifying, for the benefit of Landlord, that such portion of the Permitted Alterations has been completed in accordance with the plans approved by Landlord (excepting only minor field changes not inconsistent with the intent of such approved plans and

 

 

4

 

 


any change orders approved by Landlord) and in compliance with all Applicable Requirements; (iii) Tenant's delivery to Landlord of lien releases, in statutory form, from the Tenant's contractor, major subcontractors, and any other persons and entities providing work or materials covered by such statement who have given a preliminary 20-day notice in accordance with California Civil Code Section 3097; and (iv) Tenant's delivery to Landlord of as-built plans and specifications for the Permitted Alterations, if appropriate (provided that, in all cases, Tenant shall deliver to Landlord reasonably detailed plans and specifications for its cabling).

(c)                    If Tenant fails to submit reasonably satisfactory documentation requesting disbursement of the Alterations Allowance on or before December 31, 2010, Landlord shall have no further obligation to provide the Alterations Allowance or any remaining balance thereof to Tenant, nor shall Tenant be entitled to any credit against Rent for any unused portion.

3.7                Transfer Premium . Section 14.3.1 of the Existing Lease is hereby deleted and replaced in its entirety with the following:

"If Landlord consents to a Transfer, as a condition thereto which the parties hereby agree is reasonable, Tenant shall pay to Landlord fifty percent (50%) of any "Transfer Premium," as that term is defined in this Section 14.3 , received by Tenant from such Transferee. " Transfer Premium " means (i)(a) in the case of an assignment, any consideration (including, without limitation, payment for leasehold improvements) paid by the assignee on account of such assignment, and (b) in the case of any other Transfer, all rent, additional rent or other consideration paid by the Transferee to the Transferor pursuant to such Transfer in excess of the base rent and additional rent payable by such Transferor during the term of the Transfer on a per rentable square foot basis, minus (ii) any brokerage commissions, reasonable attorneys' fees and tenant improvement costs or allowances paid by Transferor in connection with the Transfer (" Recoverable Expenses "). For purposes of calculating the Transfer Premium in connection with a sublease, the Recoverable Expenses shall first be deducted before payment to Landlord of Landlord's share of the Transfer Premium. Payment of the portion of the Transfer Premium due Landlord hereunder shall be made to Landlord as follows: (1) in the case of an assignment, the Transferor shall pay the portion of the Transfer Premium due to Landlord within ten (10) business days after the Transferor receives the consideration described in clause (i)(a) above; and (2) in the case of any other Transfer, after Tenant has recouped the Recoverable Expenses from the consideration described in clause (i)(b) above, then on the first day of each succeeding month during the term of the Transfer, the Transferee shall pay directly to Landlord fifty percent (50%) of the amount by which the rent, additional rent or other consideration due from the Transferee for such month exceeds the base rent and additional rent payable by the applicable Transferor for said month which is allocable to the Contemplated Transfer Space."

3.8                Recapture. Notwithstanding the provisions of Section 14.4 of the Existing Lease, Landlord shall have no right to recapture the Contemplated Transfer Space unless the Contemplated Transfer Space constitutes at least sixty percent (60%) of the Building to which

 

 

5

 

 


the Transfer is applicable, in which event Landlord shall exercise such right of recapture by giving written notice to Tenant within thirty (30) days after receipt of the Transfer Notice.

3.9                Holding Over. Article 16 of the Existing Lease is hereby deleted and replaced in its entirety with the following:

"If Tenant holds over after the expiration of the Lease Term or earlier termination thereof, with or without the express written consent of Landlord, such tenancy shall be from month-to-month only, and shall not constitute a renewal hereof or an extension for any further term, and in such case Tenant shall pay Rent at a monthly rate equal to (a) for the first thirty (30) days of such holding over, one hundred percent (100%) of the Base Rent payable by Tenant immediately prior to such holding over (without regard to any abatements of Rent on account of casualty or otherwise), plus Tenant's Share of Operating Expenses and Tax Expenses, computed on a monthly basis for each full or partial month Tenant remains in possession; and (ii) thereafter, an amount equal to one hundred fifty percent (150%) of the Base Rent payable by Tenant immediately prior to such holding over (without regard to any abatements of Rent on account of casualty or otherwise), plus Tenant's Share of Operating Expenses and Tax Expenses, computed on a monthly basis for each full or partial month Tenant remains in possession. Such month-to-month tenancy shall be subject to every other applicable term, covenant and agreement contained herein. If Tenant holds over after any such month-to-month tenancy has been terminated, then Tenant shall be a tenant at sufferance only, for the entire Premises upon all of the terms and conditions of this Lease as might be applicable to such tenancy; provided, however, that, as liquidated damages and not as a penalty, Tenant shall pay Base Rent at a monthly rate equal to one hundred fifty percent (150%) of the Base Rent payable by Tenant immediately prior to such holding over (without regard to any abatements of Rent on account of casualty or otherwise), plus Tenant's Share of Operating Expenses and Tax Expenses, computed on a monthly basis for each full or partial month Tenant remains in possession. Nothing contained in this Article 16 shall be construed as consent by Landlord to any holding over by Tenant, and Landlord expressly reserves the right to require Tenant to surrender possession of the Premises to Landlord as provided in this Lease upon the expiration or other termination of this Lease. The provisions of this Article 16 shall not be deemed to limit or constitute a waiver of any other rights or remedies of Landlord provided herein or at law. If Tenant fails to surrender the Premises upon the termination or expiration of this Lease, in addition to any other liabilities to Landlord accruing therefrom, Tenant shall protect, defend, indemnify and hold Landlord harmless from all Claims resulting from such failure, including, without limiting the generality of the foregoing, any Claims made by any succeeding tenant founded upon such failure to surrender and any lost profits to Landlord resulting therefrom."

3.10              Roof Rights. Section 22.2(c) of the Lease is hereby deleted and, Tenant shall have the exclusive use of the roof of the Building, except for Landlord’s rights of entry for inspection, repair, replacement or the provision of services as are set forth in the Lease.

 

 

6

 

 


3.11              Signage. Section 23.1 of the Existing Lease is hereby deleted and replaced in its entirety with the following:

"23.1    Signage Rights . Tenant shall not place on any portion of the Premises any sign, placard, lettering, banner, displays, graphic, decor or other advertising or communicative material which is visible from the exterior of the Building without Landlord's prior written approval; provided, however, that Tenant shall, subject to the provisions of this Section 23.1 , be entitled to the following signage rights in accordance with Landlord's signage standards in effect at the time (" Signage Standards ") and all Applicable Requirements (" Tenant's Signage Rights "): (a) Project-standard tenant identification signage on the monument sign for the Building and (b) Tenant-identification signage on the top of the Building. The material, typeface, graphic format and proportions of Tenant's signs, as well as the precise location of such signs, shall be subject to Landlord's approval, which shall not be unreasonably withheld. Tenant, at its expense, shall be responsible for obtaining all approvals for such signs and for obtaining and installing such signs. The failure of Tenant to obtain such approvals shall not release Tenant from any of its obligations under this Lease. Any approved signs shall strictly conform to all Applicable Requirements and shall be installed and removed at Tenant's expense. Tenant, at its sole expense, shall maintain such signs in good condition and repair during the Term. Prior to the expiration or earlier termination of this Lease, Tenant at its sole cost shall remove all of its exterior signage and repair any and all damage caused to the Building and/or Project (including and fading or discoloration) by such signs and/or the removal of such signs from the Building and/or Project."

Promptly after execution of this Amendment, Landlord shall submit the Project's Signage Standards for governmental approval, which, as to the top of the Building Tenant-identification signage referenced in clause (b) above (" Tenant's Building Signage "), shall be consistent with the signage shown on Exhibit B attached hereto, and Landlord shall use commercially reasonable efforts to get such Signage Standards approved. Concurrently with Landlord's submittal of the Project's Signage Standards for governmental approval, Tenant shall have the right to submit Tenant's Building Signage for governmental approval. Subject to Landlord's obtaining approval of the Signage Standards, and subject to Tenant's obtaining all required approvals for Tenant's Building Signage, (1) Tenant's Building Signage shall be in the approximate location shown on Exhibit B attached hereto, and (2) Landlord hereby approves the typeface, graphic format and proportions of the signage shown on Exhibit B . However, Tenant acknowledges that, if changes to the signage shown on Exhibit B are required to obtain governmental approval of Tenant's Building Signage or the Signage Standards, then the location of Tenant's Building Signage and/or the typeface, graphic format and proportions of such signage shall be modified accordingly; and, further, if the approved Signage Standards do not, for any reason, permit signage on the exterior of the Building, Landlord shall have no liability to Tenant, and Tenant shall not be released from any of its obligations under the Lease.

3.12              Pre-Existing Hazardous Substances. Notwithstanding the provisions of Section 24.2 of the Existing Lease, if any Remedial Work is required to be performed as a result of Hazardous Substances in, on or below the Premises as of the Effective Date, then, except to

 

 

7

 

 


the extent such Remedial Work is covered by Tenant's environmental indemnity contained in the last sentence of Section 24.2.1(a) of the Existing Lease or by the provisions of Section 24.2.3 of the Existing Lease, Landlord shall perform or cause to be performed such Remedial Work, at no cost to Tenant, in compliance with Applicable Requirements.

3.13              Prohibited Uses. Without limiting the provisions of Section 5.2 of the Existing Lease, no portion of the Premises shall be used for any of the following uses: any pornographic or obscene purposes, any commercial sex establishment, any pornographic, obscene, nude or semi-nude performances, modeling, materials, activities, or sexual conduct or any other use that, as of the time of the execution hereof, has or could reasonably be expected to have a material adverse effect on the Property or its use, operation or value.

 

4.

Condition of Premises.

 

4.1

Building Systems - Good Working Condition.

(a)                    Tenant acknowledges and agrees that its possession of the Premises as of the Effective Date is a continuation of Tenant's possession of the Premises under the Existing Lease, and that, except as specifically set forth in the Lease, including, without limitation, in Section 3.4 and Section 3.5 above, this Section 4.1 and Section 4.2 below, Tenant agrees to accept the Premises as of the Effective Date in their existing condition, "as is", without any obligation of Landlord to repair, remodel, improve or alter the Premises, to perform any other construction or other work of improvement upon the Premises, or to provide Tenant with any construction or refurbishing allowance whatsoever; provided, however, that, on the Effective Date, the roof of the Building shall be in watertight condition, the Base Building Systems and the Common Areas, including walkways, parking lots and driveways and landscaping, shall be in good working condition and repair (except to the extent repairs are necessitated by the acts or omissions of Tenant or any Tenant Parties).

(b)                    If it is determined that, on the Effective Date, the roof of the Building is not in a watertight condition, or any of the Base Building Systems or Common Areas are not in good working condition and repair (for reasons other than the acts or omissions of Tenant or any Tenant Parties), then Landlord shall not be liable to Tenant for any damages, but as Tenant's sole remedy, Landlord, at no cost to Tenant, shall perform such work or take such other action as may be necessary to place the same in the required condition; provided, however, that if Tenant does not give Landlord written notice of any deficiency in the Base Building Systems within thirty (30) days following the Effective Date, correction of such deficiency shall be the obligation of Landlord or Tenant, as the case may be, pursuant to Article 7 of the Existing Lease (as the same is amended by Section 3.4 of this Amendment).

(c)                    For purposes of the Lease, the " Base Building Systems " means the base building mechanical, electrical (excluding light bulb of maintenance), plumbing and fire and life safety systems, and glazing and roll-up doors located in or on the Premises on the Effective Date that serve the Premises generally (as distinguished from the portions of such systems that may be installed or modified by Tenant, and any systems, equipment or components that serve a particular portion of the Premises or Tenant's particular use of the Premises, such as a computer server room, "clean room" or other laboratory space).

 

 

8

 

 


4.2                Compliance with Applicable Requirements. In addition to Landlord's obligations in Section 4.1 above, Landlord shall, at no cost to Tenant, perform all work required to cause the Premises, including the base building, and Common Areas to comply with Applicable Requirements as of the Effective Date, including current laws, rules, regulations and ordinances, and including, specifically, the ADA (as such Applicable Requirements are interpreted by applicable governmental or quasi-governmental authorities as of said date), so long as such compliance is not necessitated by reason of the installation of any of Tenant's specialized improvements or personal property (i.e., improvements or personal property that are non-standard and required because of Tenant's particular use of the Premises) to be constructed or installed in the Premises, or by Tenant's particular use of the Premises or the particular manner in which it conducts (or proposes to conduct) its business therein (collectively, " Tenant's Particular Requirements "); and, provided, however, that, (a) the foregoing shall not affect Landlord's obligations set forth in Section 3.5(d) above in the event that structural changes to the Building are required as a result of Tenant's Alterations; and (b) unless Tenant gives Landlord written notice of the non-compliance within one hundred twenty (120) days after the commencement of Tenant's Alterations pursuant to Section 3.5 above, Landlord shall have no further responsibility or liability therefor, except as otherwise expressly provided in the Lease. Nothing contained herein shall be deemed to prohibit Landlord from obtaining a variance or relying upon a grandfathered right in order to achieve compliance with Applicable Requirements hereunder. Any compliance work required to be performed resulting from Tenant's Particular Requirements shall be Tenant's sole responsibility.

 

5.

Extension Options .

5.1                Grant of Additional Extension Options; Additional Extension Terms. Landlord hereby grants to Tenant two (2) successive options to further extend the Lease Term (each, an " Extension Option " and, collectively, the " Extension Options ") for additional periods of five (5) years each (each, an " Additional Extension Term ") commencing on the first day following the Lease Expiration Date (as the same may have then been extended), on the terms and subject to the conditions set forth in this Section 5 ; provided, however, that (a) the Extension Options shall be exercised, if at all, only with respect to the entire Premises (as the same may then be expanded); (b) the second Extension Option may be exercised only if the first Extension Option has been duly exercised; and (c) if Tenant is in default beyond applicable notice and cure periods under any of the terms, covenants or conditions of the Lease either at the time Tenant exercises any Extension Option or upon the commencement of the applicable Additional Extension Term, Landlord shall have, in addition to all of Landlord's other rights and remedies provided in the Lease, the right to terminate such Extension Option and to unilaterally revoke Tenant's exercise of such Extension Option, in which event the Lease shall expire on the Lease Expiration Date, unless sooner terminated pursuant to the terms hereof, and Tenant shall have no further rights under the Lease to renew or extend the Lease Term.

5.2                Exercise. Tenant shall exercise any Extension Option, if at all, by giving Landlord unconditional, irrevocable written notice of such election not more than three hundred sixty (360) days nor less than two hundred seventy (270) days prior to the Lease Expiration Date (as the same may have then been extended), the time of such exercise being of the essence. Subject to the provisions of this Section 5 , upon the giving of such notice, the Lease and the Lease Term shall be extended without execution or delivery of any other or further documents.

 

 

9

 

 


5.3                Terms and Conditions. If Tenant exercises an Extension Option pursuant to Section 5.2 above, all of the terms, covenants and conditions of the Lease shall continue in full force and effect during the applicable Additional Extension Term, including provisions regarding payment of Additional Rent, which shall remain payable on the terms herein set forth, except that (a) the Base Rent during such Additional Extension Term shall be as determined in accordance with Section 5.4 below, (b) Tenant shall continue to possess and occupy the Premises (as the same may be expanded) in their existing condition, "as is", as of the commencement of such Additional Extension Term, and, except as set forth in the Lease, Landlord shall have no obligation to repair, remodel, improve or alter the Premises, to perform any other construction or other work of improvement upon the Premises, or to provide Tenant with any construction or refurbishing allowance whatsoever, and (c) Tenant shall have no further rights to extend the Lease Term after the expiration of the second Additional Extension Term.

 

5.4

Determination of Base Rent.

(a)                    The Base Rent payable by Tenant for the Premises during the first Additional Extension Term shall be ninety-five percent (95%) of the " Market Rate " (as defined below) for the Premises, valued as of the commencement of such Additional Extension Term, determined in the manner hereinafter provided; and the Base Rent payable by Tenant for the Premises during the second Additional Extension Term shall be one hundred percent (100%) of the Market Rate for the Premises, valued as of the commencement of such Additional Extension Term, determined in the manner hereinafter provided. As used herein, the term " Market Rate " shall mean the annual base rent that a willing tenant would pay, and that a willing landlord would accept, at arm's length, for space comparable to the Premises at other comparable office/R&D buildings in the vicinity of the Building (" Comparable Buildings "), based upon binding lease transactions for tenants in the Comparable Buildings that, where possible, commence or are to commence within six (6) months prior to or within six (6) months after the commencement of the applicable Additional Extension Term (" Comparison Leases "). Comparison Leases shall include renewal and new non-renewal tenancies, but shall exclude subleases and leases of space subject to another tenant's expansion rights and renewals if there was a base rent floor applicable to the determination of base rent. Rental rates payable under Comparison Leases shall be adjusted to account for variations between the Lease and the Comparison Leases with respect to: (1) the length of the Additional Extension Term compared to the lease term of the Comparison Leases; (2) rental structure, including, without limitation, rental rates per rentable square foot (including type, gross or net, and if gross, adjusting for base year or expense stop), additional rental, escalation provisions, all other payments and escalations; (3) the size of the Premises compared to the size of the premises of the Comparison Leases; (4) location, floor levels and efficiencies of the floor(s) for which the determination is being made; (5) free rent, moving expenses and other cash payments, allowances or other monetary concessions affecting the rental rate; (6) the age and quality of construction of the Building (including compliance with applicable codes on the applicable floors); and (7) leasehold improvements and/or allowances, including the amounts thereof in renewal leases, and taking into account, in the case of renewal leases (including the Lease), the value of existing leasehold improvements to the renewal tenant.

(b)                    Not later than six (6) months prior to the commencement of an Additional Extension Term, provided Tenant has given valid notice of exercise of the applicable Extension Option, Landlord shall deliver to Tenant a good faith written proposal of the Market

 

 

10

 

 


Rate. Within twenty-one (21) days after receipt of Landlord's proposal, Tenant shall notify Landlord in writing (1) that Tenant accepts Landlord's proposal or (2) that Tenant elects to submit the determination of Market Rate to arbitration in accordance with subparagraphs (c) through (d) below. If Tenant does not give Landlord a timely notice in response to Landlord's proposal, Landlord's proposal of Market Rate shall be binding upon Tenant.

(c)                    If Tenant timely elects to submit the determination of Market Rate to arbitration, Landlord and Tenant shall first negotiate in good faith in an attempt to determine the Market Rate for the applicable Additional Extension Term. If Landlord and Tenant are able to agree within thirty (30) days following the delivery of Tenant's notice to Landlord electing arbitration (or if Tenant accepts Landlord's initial proposal), then such agreement shall constitute a determination of the Market Rate for purposes of this Section, and the parties shall immediately execute an amendment to the Lease stating the Market Rate and the Base Rent for such Additional Extension Term. If Landlord and Tenant are unable to agree on the Market Rate within such negotiating period, then within fifteen (15) days after the expiration of such negotiating period, the parties shall meet and concurrently deliver to each other their respective written estimates of the Market Rate for the Additional Extension Term, supported by the reasons therefor (respectively, " Landlord's Determination " and " Tenant's Determination "). Landlord's Determination may be more or less than its initial proposal of the Market Rate. If either party fails to deliver its Determination in a timely manner, then the Market Rate shall be the amount specified by the other party. If Tenant's Determination of the Market Rate is higher than Landlord's Determination, then the Market Rate shall be the average of the two. In every other case, the Market Rate shall be determined as follows, each party being bound to its Determination and such Determinations establishing the only two choices available to the Appraisal Panel (as hereinafter defined):

(i)              Within ten (10) days after the parties exchange Landlord's and Tenant's Determinations, the parties shall each appoint one arbitrator who shall be a licensed California real estate broker with at least ten (10) years' experience in leasing commercial office space similar to the Building in the commercial submarket that the Building is located immediately prior to his or her appointment, and be familiar with the rentals then being charged in the Comparable Buildings. The parties may appoint the real estate brokers who assisted them in making their Determinations as their respective arbitrators. Within twenty (20) days following their appointment, the two arbitrators so selected shall appoint a third, similarly-qualified arbitrator (the " Independent Arbitrator ").

(ii)             If either Landlord or Tenant fails to appoint an arbitrator, then the Market Rate for the Additional Extension Term shall be the Determination of the other party. If the two party-designated arbitrators have not selected a third arbitrator by the end of the 20-day period above, then either party, on behalf of both, may request such appointment by the local office of the American Arbitration Association (or any successor thereto), or in the absence, failure, refusal or inability of either of such entities to act, then either party may apply to the presiding judge for the County in which the Premises are located, for the appointment of such an Independent Arbitrator, and the other party shall not raise any question as to the court's full power and jurisdiction to entertain the application and make the appointment. In all events, the determination of the arbitrators shall be limited solely to the issue area of whether Landlord's or

 

 

11

 

 


Tenant's Determination is the closest to the actual Market Rate as determined by the arbitrators, taking into account the requirements of Section 5.4(a) above.

(iii)            Within five (5) days following notification of the identity of the third (3rd) arbitrator so appointed, Landlord and Tenant shall submit copies of Landlord's Determination and Tenant's Determination to the three arbitrators (the " Appraisal Panel "). The Appraisal Panel shall conduct a hearing, at which Landlord and Tenant may each make supplemental oral and/or written presentations, with an opportunity for rebuttal by the other party and for questioning by the members of the Appraisal Panel, if they so wish. Within a reasonable time following the hearing, the Appraisal Panel, by majority vote, shall select either Landlord's Determination or Tenant's Determination as the Base Rent for the applicable Additional Extension Term, and shall have no right to propose a middle ground or to modify either of the two proposals or the provisions of the Lease. The Appraisal Panel shall attempt to render a decision within fifteen (15) business days after appointment. In any case, the Appraisal Panel shall render a decision within forty-five (45) days after appointment. The decision of the Appraisal Panel shall be final and binding upon the parties, and may be enforced in accordance with the provisions of California law. In the event of the failure, refusal or inability of any member of the Appraisal Panel to act, a successor shall be appointed in the manner that applied to the selection of the member being replaced. Each party shall pay the fees and expenses of the arbitrator designated by such party, and one-half of the fees and expenses of the Independent Arbitrator and the expenses incident to the proceedings (excluding attorneys' fees and similar expenses of the parties which shall be borne separately by each of the parties).

(d)                    Until the matter is resolved by agreement between the parties or a decision is rendered in any arbitration commenced pursuant to this Section 5.4 , Tenant's monthly payments of Base Rent shall be in an amount equal to Landlord's Determination. Within ten (10) business days following the resolution of such dispute by the parties or the decision of the arbitrators, as applicable, Tenant shall pay to Landlord, or Landlord shall pay to Tenant, the amount of any deficiency or excess, as the case may be, in the Base Rent theretofore paid.

5.5                    Extension Option Personal to Tenant. Tenant's right to exercise the Extension Options is personal to, and may be exercised only by, the Original Tenant or any assignee of Tenant's interest in the Lease pursuant to Section 14.8 of the Existing Lease (a " Permitted Assignee "), and only if the Original Tenant or any Permitted Transferee continues to occupy at least sixty percent (60%) of the Premises at the time of such exercise. If Tenant shall assign this Lease or sublet more than forty percent (40%) of the Premises (other than to a Permitted Transferee) under a sublease which is effective at any time during the final three (3) months of the Extension Term (or first Additional Extension Term, as the case may be), then immediately upon such assignment or subletting, Tenant's right to exercise the remaining Extension Options shall simultaneously terminate and be of no further force or effect. No assignee (other than a Permitted Assignee) or subtenant shall have any right to exercise the Extension Options granted herein.

6.                       Expansion Option. Landlord hereby grants to the Original Tenant or any Permitted Assignee the right to lease additional space in the Project upon the terms and conditions set forth in this Section 6 (" Expansion Option ").

 

 

12

 

 


6.1                    Expansion Spaces. Original Tenant or a Permitted Assignee only (and not any other assignee, sublessee or other Transferee of Tenant's interest in this Lease) shall have the right to lease one of the "Available Expansion Spaces," as that term is defined below, in the manner as set forth in this Section 6 . The term " Available Expansion Spaces ," as used in this Amendment, shall mean the following buildings in the Project; provided, however, that unless 940 Stewart Drive becomes available for lease to third parties prior to the Expansion Exercise Deadline, 940 Stewart Drive shall not constitute an Available Expansion Space hereunder.

Available Expansion Spaces :

 

940 Stewart Drive:

approximately 44,700 rentable square feet

 

920 Stewart Drive:

approximately 63,780 rentable square feet

 

945 Stewart Drive:

approximately 63,780 rentable square feet

 

6.2

Method of Exercise .

(a)                    Tenant shall have the right to exercise the Expansion Option, by giving Landlord written notice (" Exercise Notice ") of the exercise of such Expansion Option not later than June 1, 2010 (" Expansion Exercise Deadline "), time being of the essence, which Exercise Notice must, in Tenant's sole discretion, identify which one of the then Available Expansion Spaces that Tenant wishes to lease from Landlord (which, as to the buildings located at 920 Stewart Drive and 945 Stewart Drive, must be exercised by Tenant with respect to the entirety of one floor [ i.e., at least 31,890 rentable square feet] or the entirety of the building; and which, as to the building located at 940 Stewart Drive, must be exercised by Tenant with respect to the entirety of one floor [i.e., at least 22,350 rentable square feet] or the entirety of the building). The building, or portion of a building, that Tenant identifies in such Exercise Notice shall, for purposes hereof, be the " Expansion Space ".

(b)                    Notwithstanding the provisions of Section 6.2(a) above to the contrary, if, at any time before the Expansion Exercise Deadline, Landlord receives an offer from a bona fide third party to lease the building located at 920 Stewart Drive or 945 Stewart Drive (or, if applicable, 940 Stewart Drive), that Landlord is prepared to accept, then, before Landlord enters into a lease or letter of intent with respect to such building, Landlord shall so notify Tenant, in which event the Expansion Exercise Deadline with respect to such building only shall be accelerated to mean the earlier to occur of (i) the date that is ten (10) business days following Tenant's receipt of such notice, or (ii) June 1, 2010.

6.3                    Lease of Expansion Space. If Tenant timely and validly exercises the Expansion Option, then this Lease shall be deemed to be modified to provide that the applicable Expansion Space shall become part of the Premises and, therefore, subject to all of the terms and conditions of the Lease which apply to the Premises, except that with respect to such Expansion Space:

(a)                    Landlord shall use commercially reasonable efforts to deliver possession of the Expansion Space to Tenant not later than September 1, 2010 or, in the event that the Expansion Space is the building located at 945 Stewart Drive, not later than March 1, 2011 (as applicable, the " Expansion Space Delivery Deadline "), so that Tenant can commence its

 

 

13

 

 


Alterations, which shall be performed pursuant to Article 8 of the Existing Lease; provided, however, that, if a Force Majeure event (including a holdover by the previous tenant) causes a delay in delivery of possession of the Expansion Space to Tenant on or before the Expansion Space Delivery Deadline, then Landlord shall not be liable to Tenant for the failure of the same to occur on or before such date, provided that, in the case of a holdover by a previous tenant, Landlord agrees to bring an unlawful detainer action in exercising its commercially reasonable efforts to deliver possession of the Expansion Space to Tenant. Without limiting the foregoing, if Landlord fails to deliver possession of the Expansion Space to Tenant within sixty (60) days following the Expansion Space Delivery Deadline (" Outside Delivery Deadline "), then Tenant, as its sole remedy, shall be entitled to a rent credit equal to Two and 2/10ths Cents ($0.022) per rentable square foot of the Expansion Space for each day that Landlord is delayed in delivering possession of the Expansion Space to Tenant beyond the Outside Delivery Deadline, which credit Tenant may apply against Rent payable by Tenant for the Expansion Space following the Expansion Space Commencement Date, until such credit is exhausted. Provided that Landlord uses commercially reasonable efforts to deliver possession of the Expansion Space to Tenant, the Outside Delivery Deadline shall be extended by the number of days that Landlord is delayed in delivering possession of the Expansion Space to Tenant due to any Force Majeure event.

(b)                    Subject to delay as provided in Section 6.3(a) above, Tenant shall commence payment of the Base Rent for the Expansion Space and the term of the Expansion Space shall commence upon that date (the " Expansion Space Commencement Date ") which is one hundred twenty (120) days following the date that Landlord delivers possession of the Expansion Space to Tenant, and the Lease Term for the Expansion Space shall expire on September 30, 2014, and shall be coterminous with the Lease Term with respect to the initial Premises. Notwithstanding the foregoing, in the event that the Expansion Space is the building located at 945 Stewart Drive, Landlord shall not deliver possession of the Expansion Space to Tenant sooner than September 1, 2010, and the Expansion Space Commencement Date shall not occur sooner than December 30, 2010.

(c)                    Tenant shall accept the Expansion Space in its then existing "as is" condition, except as specifically set forth in the Lease and in Section 3.4(b), Section 4.1 and Section 4.2 above (provided that, for purposes of these Sections, all references to the "Premises" shall mean the applicable Expansion Space, all references to the "Effective Date" shall mean the date that Landlord delivers possession of the Expansion Space to Tenant; and, in Section 3.4(b), the reference to "May 1, 2010" shall mean one (1) year following the date that Landlord delivers possession of the Expansion Space to Tenant). Further, notwithstanding the foregoing, upon Tenant's written request and satisfaction of the conditions set forth in Section 3.6(b) above, Landlord will contribute to the cost of any Alterations that Tenant performs in or to the Expansion Space (collectively, " Expansion Space Alterations ") to the extent of the lesser of (i) the "Prorated Allowance Amount" (as defined below) or (ii) the actual cost of such Alterations (the lesser of the previously-described amounts being hereinafter referred to as the " Expansion Space Alterations Allowance "). The Expansion Space Alterations Allowance may only be applied to the payment or reimbursement of documented "hard costs" of labor and materials and "soft costs" relating to the Alterations. Tenant shall pay for all costs of Alterations in excess of the Expansion Space Alterations Allowance. If Tenant fails to submit reasonably satisfactory documentation requesting disbursement of the Expansion Space Alterations Allowance within eighteen (18) months following the Expansion Space Commencement Date, Landlord shall have

 

 

14

 

 


no further obligation to provide the Expansion Space Alterations Allowance or any remaining balance thereof to Tenant, nor shall Tenant be entitled to any credit against Rent for any unused portion. As used herein, the "Prorated Allowance Amount" means Sixteen and 50/100 Dollars ($16.50) per rentable square foot in the Expansion Space, multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of months between the Expansion Space Commencement Date and September 30, 2014 (prorated for any partial month on the basis of a 30-day month), and the denominator of which is sixty (60). For example, if the Expansion Space Commencement Date is January 15, 2011, and the Expansion Space consists of 31,890 rentable square feet, then the Prorated Allowance Amount shall equal $390,253.88 ( i.e., $16.50 x 31,980 = $526,185.00, multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is 44.5 and the denominator of which is 60).

(d)                    Commencing on the Expansion Space Commencement Date, Tenant shall pay Base Rent for the Expansion Space, which shall be calculated at the same rates (and subject to the same periodic increases) as are applicable to the remainder of the Premises pursuant to Section 3.1 above; provided, however, that Tenant shall be entitled to an abatement of Base Rent and Tenant's Share of Direct Expenses for a number of months (or portions of months) after the Expansion Space Commencement Date, equal to the product of (i) a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of months between the Expansion Space Commencement Date and September 30, 2014 (prorated for any partial month on the basis of a 30-day month), and the denominator of which is sixty (60), multiplied by (ii) five (5). For example, if the Expansion Space Commencement Date occurs on July 1, 2010, then Tenant shall be entitled to an abatement of Base Rent and Tenant's Share of Direct Expenses from the Expansion Space Commencement Date through November 10, 2010 (i.e., 52 / 60 months x 5 = 4.333 months of abatement), at which time Base Rent shall equal $1.34 per rentable square foot in the Expansion Space per month until September 30, 2011. Base Rent for the Expansion Space shall then increase on October 1, 2011 to $1.38 per rentable square foot in the Expansion Space per month, on October 1, 2012 to $1.42 per rentable square foot in the Expansion Space per month, and so on as more particularly set forth in Section 3.1 .

(e)                    Tenant’s Share shall equal 100% of the Building for purposes of calculating of Tenant's Share of Direct Expenses for the Expansion Space, unless the Expansion Space comprises less than the entirety of a building, in which event Tenant's Share of Direct Expenses for the Expansion Space shall equal 50%, and the Existing Lease will be modified as Landlord may reasonably require to reflect a multi-tenant building ( e.g., deletion of Tenant's exclusive right to the roof of the multi-tenant building, deletion or modification of Tenant's exterior signage rights to accommodate another tenant of the building).

(f)                    Prior to the Expansion Space Commencement Date, Tenant shall pay to Landlord, as an increase in the Security Deposit, an amount equal to the monthly installment of Base Rent for the Expansion Space payable for September 2014.

6.4                    Amendment to Lease . If Tenant timely exercises its right to lease Expansion Space as set forth herein, then, within fifteen (15) days thereafter, Landlord and Tenant shall execute an amendment adding such Expansion Space to the Lease upon the same terms and conditions as the initial Premises, except as otherwise set forth in this Section 6 .

 

 

15

 

 


6.5                    Expansion Option Personal to Tenant; No Defaults. Tenant's right to exercise the Expansion Option is personal to, and may be exercised only by, the Original Tenant or any Permitted Assignee, and only if the Original Tenant or any Permitted Transferee continues to occupy at least sixty percent (60%) of the Premises at the time of such exercise. If Tenant shall assign this Lease or sublet more than forty percent (40%) of the Premises (other than to a Permitted Transferee) under a sublease which is effective at any time during the final three (3) months of the Extension Term, then immediately upon such assignment or subletting, Tenant's right to exercise the Expansion Option shall simultaneously terminate and be of no further force or effect. No assignee (other than a Permitted Assignee) or subtenant shall have any right to exercise the Extension Options granted herein. If Tenant is in default beyond applicable notice and cure periods under any of the terms, covenants or conditions of the Lease either at the time Tenant exercises the Expansion Option or upon the Expansion Space Commencement Date, then Landlord shall have, in addition to all of Landlord's other rights and remedies provided in the Lease, the right to terminate such Expansion Option and/or to unilaterally revoke Tenant's exercise of such Expansion Option.

 

7.

UPS/Emergency Generator .

7.1                    Generator License. Landlord hereby grants to Tenant a license (the " Generator License "), at Tenant's sole cost and expense, but otherwise without charge, to install, operate, maintain and use in a location reasonably approved by Landlord and Tenant, a UPS back-up system or electrical generator and related equipment (collectively, the " Generator "), including, but not limited to, fuel storage and lines, electrical lines and electrical power connections and meters to service the Premises, subject to, and in accordance with, the terms and conditions contained in Article 8 of the Existing Lease (as the same is amended above) and this Section 7 .

 

7.2

General Requirements. The Generator License is subject to the following requirements:

(a)                    The manufacturer of the Generator, the type, size, and quality of the Generator, the substance to be stored in the Generator, the precise location of the Generator, all safety, monitoring, and related Generator equipment, the method and manner of installation, and all other matters material to the installation of the Generator, including, without limitation, all Building penetrations, are subject to Landlord's prior written approval, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld.

(b)                    Tenant's contractor for installation of the Generator shall be subject to Landlord's prior approval (which approval will not be unreasonably withheld), and such contractor must provide evidence of insurance reasonably satisfactory to Landlord prior to commencing work in or about the Building.

(c)                    The Generator must be installed in a good and workmanlike manner and in accordance with all Applicable Requirements, and in accordance with plans and specifications approved in advance by Landlord. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, such plans and specifications must include for Landlord's approval, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld, (i) a hazardous substances management plan, (ii) an elevation showing the location of penetrations, and planned methods of waterproofing the penetrations; and (iii) details on screening the Generator and the Generator enclosure. The giving of any approval by Landlord shall not eliminate any of Tenant's obligations under the Lease, including, without limitation, Tenant's obligation to obtain all required permits and to secure

 

 

16

 

 


compliance with all Applicable Requirements and other requirements set forth in Section 7.4 below. Tenant agrees to pay, within thirty (30) days after receipt of an invoice therefor, Landlord's actual out-of-pocket costs incurred in payments to third parties with respect to Landlord's review and approval of the plans and specifications.

(d)                    Tenant shall provide Landlord with reasonable advance notice prior to commencing installation of the Generator or other work on or to the Generator from time to time, and agrees to afford Landlord the opportunity to be present for all such work.

(e)                    After the initial installation of the Generator hereunder, Tenant shall not make any alteration, addition or improvement thereto, or to the substances stored therein, without first obtaining Landlord's prior written approval thereof, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld, delayed or conditioned; and any such alterations, additions or improvements shall be subject to all the conditions and restrictions that apply to the original Generator, including, without limitation, the requirement that Tenant furnish Landlord with detailed plans and specifications relating to the proposed alterations, additions or improvements.

(f)                    Tenant shall have sole access to the Generator location for the purposes of installation, operation, maintenance and repair of the Generator, subject to reasonable rules and restrictions of Landlord.

(g)                    Tenant, at its expense, shall at all times keep the Generator in good order, condition and repair, and the Generator location and the areas immediately surrounding same neat and clean. With respect to all operations relating to the Generator, Tenant shall conduct its business and control its agents, employees and invitees in such manner as not to create any nuisance, or interfere with, annoy or disturb any other licensee or tenant of the Project or Landlord in its operation of the Building.

 

7.3

Compliance With Laws; Hazardous Substances .

(a)                    Tenant shall accept the designated location for the Generator (to be reasonably approved by Landlord and Tenant following the date of this Amendment), in its condition and "as-built" configuration existing on the Effective Date. Landlord has made no representations or promise as to the suitability or effectiveness of the Generator location for Tenant's proposed use, or as to any Applicable Requirements applicable to Tenant's proposed use of the Generator, or as to the condition of (or alteration or improvement of) the Generator location. Tenant, at its sole cost and expense, shall comply with all Applicable Requirements applicable to the installation, maintenance, operation and use of the Generator. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, Tenant shall be responsible for obtaining any building permits, and any licenses, consents, approvals or permits which may be required by any federal, state and local agencies or governmental authorities required for the installation, maintenance, operation and removal of the Generator, shall provide copies of the same to Landlord, and shall, at all times during the term of the License, comply with all requirements of any such agency or authority.

(b)                    Tenant shall respond to any release of Hazardous Substances from the Generator immediately after Tenant becomes aware of such release, regardless of the amount of the release, and shall make all required governmental notifications in the event of a release. In addition, Tenant shall immediately notify Landlord of such release after Tenant becomes aware thereof.

 

 

17

 

 


(c)                    In the event any Remedial Work is required to be performed in the Project under any Applicable Requirements, as the result of the design, installation, location, maintenance, operation or removal of the Generator by Tenant or any Tenant Parties, then, at Landlord's option, either Tenant shall perform or cause to be performed the Remedial Work in compliance with such Environmental Laws or Landlord may cause such Remedial Work to be performed and Tenant shall reimburse Landlord for the reasonable expenses thereof within thirty (30) days of demand and delivery of applicable invoices therefor. All Remedial Work performed by Tenant shall be performed by one or more contractors, selected by Tenant and reasonably approved in advance in writing by Landlord, and under the supervision of a consulting engineer selected by Tenant and reasonably approved in advance in writing by Landlord. All costs and expenses of such Remedial Work shall be paid by Tenant, including, without limitation, the charges of such contractor(s), the consulting engineer, and Landlord's reasonable attorneys' fees and costs incurred in connection with monitoring or review of such Remedial Work. Nothing in this Section 7 shall affect any of Landlord's other rights (or Tenant's obligations) elsewhere in the Lease.

(d)                    Tenant shall immediately forward to Landlord copies of any and all notices, correspondence, warnings, guidance, or other written materials received from any governmental authority in connection with the Generator, the substances contained therein, or the equipment or Tenant's operations in connection therewith.

7.4                    Damage to Building. Any damage to the Building resulting from the installation, operation, maintenance or removal of the Generator, including without limitation, leakage or water damage, shall be repaired by Tenant, at Tenant's sole cost and expense; provided, however, that to the extent Tenant fails to make such repairs after applicable notice and cure periods (except in an Emergency Situation, in which event Landlord shall furnish Tenant with reasonable notice in light of the circumstances), Landlord may make such repairs, in which event Tenant shall reimburse Landlord for the reasonable cost thereof within thirty (30) days following receipt of a reasonably detailed invoice therefor.

7.5                    Ownership of Generator; Removal and Restoration. The Generator shall be Tenant's property and, at Tenant's option, Tenant may, at its own expense, remove the Generator not later than the expiration or earlier termination of the Lease, and repair all damage to the Building caused by such removal. If Tenant does not remove the Generator within thirty (30) days after the expiration or earlier termination of the Lease, then Tenant shall be conclusively presumed to have, at Landlord's election: (a) conveyed the Generator to Landlord without compensation or (b) abandoned the Generator, in which event Landlord may dispose of or store the Generator in any manner at Tenant's sole cost, without waiving Landlord's right to claim from Tenant all expenses arising out of Tenant's failure to remove the Generator, and without liability to Tenant or any other person.

7.6                    Certification. Within thirty (30) days following Landlord's request (which may be made not more frequently than once per Lease Year, except in connection with any bona fide sale,

 

 

18

 

 


financing or refinancing of the Project or any portion thereof), Tenant shall certify in writing to Landlord (and, upon Landlord's request, to any mortgagee, potential mortgagee, or potential purchaser of all or a portion of the Project) that (a) Tenant has complied with all Applicable Requirements and its obligations hereunder, including, without limitation, all maintenance and monitoring requirements, and (b) to Tenant's knowledge, neither the Generator nor the substances contained therein have resulted in soil, water, or other contamination on, under, or adjacent to the Premises or the Project and do not pose a threat to health, safety, or the environment (or, to the extent applicable, that any such contamination or threat have been fully remediated to the satisfaction of all applicable governmental entities having jurisdiction).

7.7                    Generator Inspection. Landlord and its representatives shall have the right, at any reasonable time and from time to time, to inspect the Generator, and to conduct testing, monitoring and analyses and to review any permits, documents, materials, inventories, financial data, or notices or correspondence to or from private parties or governmental authorities in connection therewith. Tenant shall maintain copies all permits and other documentation relating to the Generator at the Premises.

7.8                    Tenant Default. In the event Tenant fails or is not able, for any reason, to comply with Environmental Laws or Tenant's obligations under this Section 7 , in whole or in part, or if Landlord reasonably believes that the Generator has resulted in or threatens to cause soil, water, or other contamination or pose a threat to health, safety, or the environment, Landlord shall have the right, but not the obligation, to take any one or more of the following actions:

(a)                    To require Tenant to take such action as it may reasonably deem necessary to ensure compliance or to mitigate, abate, or correct the contamination or other threat;

(b)                    If Tenant fails to take the actions required pursuant to Section 7.8(a) within thirty (30) days (or such shorter or longer time as may be reasonable under the circumstances), to require Tenant to remove the Generator in accordance with applicable Environmental Laws and the reasonable satisfaction of Landlord, and, to the extent practicable at commercially reasonable expense, restore the area in the vicinity of the Generator to the condition existing prior to installation thereof; and/or

(c)                    Pursue all additional remedies as Landlord may have under the Lease.

 

7.9

Insurance; Indemnity .

(a)                    Tenant shall cause the insurance policies required to be maintained pursuant to Section 10.3 of the Existing Lease to cover the Generator and any Claims arising in connection with the presence, use, operation, installation, repair, maintenance, or removal of the Generator.

(b)                    Without limiting the provisions of Section 10.1 of the Existing Lease, Tenant hereby agrees, to the maximum extent permitted by law, to protect, defend, indemnify and hold Landlord and the other Landlord Parties, and each of them, harmless from and against any and all Claims arising from or connected in any way with the Generator or the operations of Tenant or any Tenant Parties in connection therewith, or a breach of any

 

 

19

 

 


representation, warranty, covenant, or condition of this Section. The foregoing indemnification shall apply regardless of the active or passive negligence of Landlord Parties and regardless of whether liability without fault or strict liability is imposed or sought to be imposed on the Landlord Parties; provided, however, that, with respect to any Landlord Party, Tenant's obligations under this Section shall be inapplicable to the extent such Claims arise from the gross negligence or willful misconduct of such Landlord Party and are not covered by the insurance required to be carried by Tenant hereunder, or to the extent such obligations are prohibited by applicable law. The foregoing indemnity shall survive the expiration or earlier termination of the Generator License and the Lease.

8.                       SNDA. Without limiting the generality of Article 18 of the Existing Lease, (a) Tenant shall, concurrently with its execution and delivery of this Amendment to Landlord, deliver to Landlord an SNDA, duly executed (and acknowledged) by Tenant, in the form attached hereto as Exhibit D ; and (b) Landlord shall use best efforts to cause LaSalle Bank, N.A., as Trustee in Trust for Holders of Deutsche Mortgage & Asset Receiving Corporation, COMM 2006-FL12 Commercial Mortgage Pass-Through Certificates (the " Existing Lender " to execute the SNDA as soon as reasonably practicable following Landlord's receipt of the SNDA from Tenant. Except for making such best efforts, Landlord will be under no duty or obligation hereunder with respect to the SNDA, nor will the failure or refusal of the Existing Lender to grant a non-disturbance agreement render Landlord liable to Tenant, or affect this Lease, in any manner.

9.                       Tenant's Certification. Tenant hereby certifies to Landlord that, as of the execution and delivery of this Amendment by Tenant to Landlord, there are no existing defenses against the enforcement of any of the obligations of Tenant under the Lease, and Landlord is not in default under the Lease by reason of its failure to perform any obligations thereunder, and there is no circumstance, event, condition or state of facts which, by the passage of time or the giving of notice, or both, could entitle Tenant to any such defenses or constitute or result in such a default.

10.                   Real Estate Brokers. Tenant represents and warrants that Tenant has not had any dealings with any broker in connection with the negotiation or execution of this Amendment, other than Jones Lang LaSalle. Tenant agrees to indemnify Landlord and hold Landlord harmless from any and all costs (including attorneys' fees), expenses or liability for commissions or other compensation claimed by any other broker or agent claiming to have had dealings with Tenant in connection with this Amendment. Landlord shall pay Jones Lang LaSalle a commission (" Broker's Commission ") pursuant to a separate agreement (" JLL Agreement ").

 

11.

Miscellaneous .

11.1                Right of Offset . To secure the Landlord’s payment of the Alterations Allowance and Broker’s Commission, Landlord agrees that, if Landlord fails to disburse any portion of the Alterations Allowance or Broker's Commission when required pursuant to this Amendment or the JLL Agreement, as the case may be, and such failure continues for 30 days following Tenant's written demand therefor (which demand shall reference, and quote verbatim in its entirety, this Section 11.1 ), then Tenant may deduct such sums from the next due installment of Base Rent and each subsequent installment of Base Rent until Tenant is fully reimbursed for such amounts; provided, however, that Tenant may not make such deduction from Base Rent if,

 

 

20

 

 


before Tenant makes such deduction, Landlord notifies Tenant in writing that Landlord denies that it was obligated to make such disbursement.

11.2              Ratification. Except as modified by this Amendment, all of the terms, conditions and provisions of the Existing Lease shall remain in full force and effect and are hereby ratified and confirmed.

11.3                     Conflict. To the extent the terms of the Existing Lease and this Amendment are inconsistent, the terms of this Amendment shall control.

11.4                     No Offer. The submission of this Amendment to Tenant for examination or execution does not create an option or constitute an offer to Tenant to amend the Existing Lease on the terms and conditions contained herein, and this Amendment shall not become effective as an amendment to the Existing Lease unless and until it has been executed and delivered by both Landlord and Tenant.

11.5                     Time of the Essence. Time is of the essence for each and every provision of this Amendment.

11.6                     Entire Agreement. This Amendment contains the entire agreement of Landlord and Tenant with respect to the subject matter hereof. It is understood that there are no oral agreements between Landlord and Tenant affecting the Existing Lease as hereby amended, and this Amendment supersedes and cancels any and all previous negotiations, representations, agreements and understandings, if any, between Landlord and Tenant and their respective agents with respect to the subject matter thereof, and none shall be used to interpret or construe the Lease. Tenant acknowledges that all prior communications from Landlord or its agents are not and were not, and shall not be construed to be, representations or warranties of Landlord or its agents as to the matters communicated, and have not and will not be relied upon by Tenant. Under no circumstances shall Tenant be entitled to any free rent, improvement allowance, leasehold improvements, or other work to the Premises, or any similar economic incentives that may have been provided Tenant in connection with entering into the Existing Lease, unless specifically set forth in this Amendment.

11.7                     Counterparts. This Amendment may be executed in two counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original and both of which together shall constitute one and the same agreement. This Amendment may be executed by a party's signature transmitted by facsimile ("fax") or by electronic mail in pdf format ("pdf"), and copies of this Amendment executed and delivered by means of faxed or pdf signatures shall have the same force and effect as copies hereof executed and delivered with original signatures. All parties hereto may rely upon faxed or pdf signatures as if such signatures were originals. Any party executing and delivering this Amendment by fax or pdf shall promptly thereafter deliver a counterpart of this Amendment containing said party's original signature. All parties hereto agree that a faxed or pdf signature page may be introduced into evidence in any proceeding arising out of or related to this Amendment as if it were an original signature page.

 

 

21

 

 


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have caused this Amendment to be executed on the dates set forth below.

LANDLORD:

CARR NP PROPERTIES, L.L.C. ,

a Delaware limited liability company

By:      
     
Name:      
     
Title:      

 

Date of Execution:      

 

TENANT:

SHORETEL, INC.,

a Delaware corporation

 

 

By:    
     
Name:      
     
Title:    
  [chairman, president or vice-president]  

 

 

By:    
     
Name:     
     
Title:    
 

[secretary, assistant secretary,

chief financial officer or assistant treasurer]

 

 

Date of Execution:  

 

 

23

 

 


EXHIBIT A

 

TENANT'S PROPOSED ALTERATIONS

 

 

Exhibit A

 

 


EXHIBIT B

 

TOP OF BUILDING SIGNAGE


 

 



 

 


EXHIBIT C

 

SUBORDINATION, NON-DISTURBANCE AND ATTORNMENT AGREEMENT

 

RECORDING REQUESTED BY

WHEN RECORDED RETURN TO

 

Bank of America N.A.

Attn: Servicing Manager

900 West Trade Street, Ste 650
Charlotte, NC 28255

 

APN: 205-22-023, 205-25-014

SUBORDINATION, NON-DISTURBANCE AND ATTORNMENT AGREEMENT

SHORETEL, INC.

Tenant

AND

LASALLE BANK, N.A., as Trustee in trust for

Holders of Deutsche Mortgage & Asset Receiving Corporation,

COMM 2006-FL12 Commercial Mortgage Pass-Through Certificates

Lender

 

Premises:

960 Stewart Drive, Sunnyvale, California

 
  Dated: as of ___________ ___, 2009  

 

 

 


SUBORDINATION,

NON-DISTURBANCE AND ATTORNMENT AGREEMENT

THIS AGREEMENT made as of this ___ day of _________, 2009, between LASALLE BANK, N.A., as Trustee in Trust for Holders of Deutsche Mortgage & Asset Receiving Corporation, COMM 2006-FL12 Commercial Mortgage Pass-Through Certificates, having an address at c/o Bank of America N.A., Attn: Servicing Manager, 900 West Trade Street, Ste 650, Charlotte, NC 28255 (hereinafter called " Lender "), and SHORETEL, INC., a California corporation, having an address at 960 Stewart Drive, Sunnyvale, California 94085 (hereinafter called " Tenant ").

RECITALS:

WHEREAS, by a lease dated as of April 20, 2007 (the " Initial Lease "), between Carr NP Properties L.L.C., a Delaware limited liability company (hereinafter called " Landlord "), as landlord, and Tenant, as tenant (" Lease "), Landlord leased to Tenant certain premises located at 960 Stewart Drive, Sunnyvale, California (the " Premises ") on the property described in Schedule "A" annexed hereto and made a part hereof (the " Property "); and

WHEREAS, the Initial Lease has been amended by that certain First Amendment to Lease dated as of June 18, 2009 (the " First Amendment "; and, together with the Initial Lease, the " Lease ");

WHEREAS, Lender has made a loan to Landlord, which loan is secured by, among other things, a mortgage or deed of trust (which mortgage or deed of trust, and all amendments, renewals, increases, modifications, replacements, substitutions, extensions, spreaders and consolidations thereof and all re-advances thereunder and addictions thereto, is referred to as the " Security Instrument ") encumbering the Property and recorded in the Santa Clara County Official Records; and

WHEREAS, Lender and Tenant desire to confirm their understanding and agreement with respect to the Lease and the Security Instrument.

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants and agreements herein contained, Lender and Tenant hereby agree and covenant as follows:

1.         The Lease, and all of the terms, covenants, provisions and conditions thereof (including, without limitation, any right of first refusal, right of first offer, option or any similar right with respect to the sale or purchase of the Property, or any portion thereof) is, shall be and shall at all times remain and continue to be subject and subordinate in all respects to the lien, terms, covenants, provisions and conditions of the Security Instrument and to all advances and re-advances made thereunder and all sums secured thereby. This provision shall be self-operative but Tenant shall execute and deliver any additional instruments which Lender may reasonably require to effect such subordination.

2.         So long as (i) Tenant is not in default (beyond any period given in the Lease to Tenant to cure such default) in the payment of rent, percentage rent or additional rent or in the performance or observance of any of the other terms, covenants, provisions or conditions of the

 

 


Lease on Tenant's part to be performed or observed, (ii) Tenant is not in default under this Agreement and (iii) the Lease is in full force and effect (except if terminated pursuant to the Landlord’s bankruptcy): (a) Tenant's possession of the Premises and Tenant's rights and privileges under the Lease, or any extensions or renewals thereof which may be effected in accordance with any option therefor which is contained in the Lease, shall not be diminished or interfered with by Lender, and Tenant's occupancy of the Premises shall not be disturbed by Lender for any reason whatsoever during the term of the Lease or any such extensions or renewals thereof and (b) Lender will not join Tenant as a party defendant in any action or proceeding to foreclose the Security Instrument or to enforce any rights or remedies of Lender under the Security Instrument which would cut-off, destroy, terminate or extinguish the Lease or Tenant's interest and estate under the Lease (except to the extent required so that Tenant's right to receive or set-off any monies or obligations owed or to be performed by any of Lender's predecessors-in-interest shall not, except as set for in Section 11.1 of the First Amendment, be enforceable thereafter against Lender or any of Lender's successors-in-interest). Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of this paragraph, if it would be procedurally disadvantageous for Lender not to name or join Tenant as a party in a foreclosure proceeding with respect to the Security Instrument, Lender may so name or join Tenant without in any way diminishing or otherwise affecting the rights and privileges granted to, or inuring to the benefit of, Tenant under this Agreement.

3.                 (A)      After notice is given by Lender that the Security Instrument is in default and that the rentals under the Lease should be paid to Lender, Tenant will attorn to Lender and pay to Lender, or pay in accordance with the directions of Lender, all rentals and other monies due and to become due to Landlord under the Lease or otherwise in respect of the Premises. Such payments shall be made regardless of any right of off-set, counterclaim or other defense which Tenant may have against Landlord, whether as the tenant under the Lease or otherwise, except as set forth in Section 11.1 of the First Amendment.

(B)      In addition, if Lender (or its nominee or designee) shall succeed to the rights of Landlord under the Lease through possession or foreclosure action, delivery of a deed or otherwise, or another person purchases the Property or the portion thereof containing the Premises upon or following foreclosure of the Security Instrument or in connection with any bankruptcy case commenced by or against Landlord, then at the request of Lender (or its nominee or designee) or such purchaser (Lender, its nominees and designees, and such purchaser, and their respective successors and assigns, each being a " Successor-Landlord "), Tenant shall attorn to and recognize Successor-Landlord as Tenant's landlord under the Lease and shall promptly execute and deliver any instrument that Successor-Landlord may reasonably request to evidence such attornment. Upon such attornment, the Lease shall continue in full force and effect as, or as if it were, a direct lease between Successor-Landlord and Tenant upon all terms, conditions and covenants as are set forth in the Lease. If the Lease shall have terminated by operation of law or otherwise as a result of or in connection with a bankruptcy case commenced by or against Landlord or a foreclosure action or proceeding or delivery of a deed in lieu, upon request of Successor-Landlord, Tenant shall promptly execute and deliver a direct lease with Successor-Landlord which direct lease shall be on substantially the same terms and conditions as the Lease (subject, however, to the provisions of clauses (i)-(v) of this paragraph 3(B) and shall be effective as of the day the Lease shall have terminated as aforesaid. Notwithstanding the continuation of the Lease, the attornment of Tenant thereunder or the

 

 


execution of a direct lease between Successor-Landlord and Tenant as aforesaid, Successor-Landlord shall not:

(i)        be liable for any previous act or omission of Landlord under the Lease;

(ii)       be subject to any off-set, defense, or counterclaim which shall have theretofore accrued to Tenant against Landlord, except as expressly provided in Section 11.1 of the First Amendment;

(iii)      be bound by any modification of the Lease or by any previous prepayment of rent or additional rent made more than one (1) month prior to the date same was due which Tenant might have paid to Landlord, unless such modification or prepayment shall have been expressly approved in writing by Lender or Successor Landlord and except as set forth in Section 3.1 of the First Amendment;

(iv)      be liable for any security deposited under the Lease unless such security has been physically delivered to Lender or Successor Landlord; and

(v)       be liable or obligated to comply with or fulfill any of the obligations of the Landlord under the Lease or any agreement relating thereto with respect to the construction of, or payment for, improvements on or above the Premises (or any portion thereof), leasehold improvements, tenant work letters and/or similar items.

4.         Tenant agrees that, without the prior written consent of Lender, it shall not (a) amend, modify, terminate or cancel the Lease or any extensions or renewals thereof, (b) tender a surrender of the Lease, (c) make a prepayment of any rent or additional rent more than one (1) month in advance of the due date thereof, and except as set forth in Section 3.1 of the First Amendment, or (d) subordinate or permit the subordination of the Lease to any lien subordinate to the Security Instrument. Any such purported action without such consent shall be void as against the holder of the Security Instrument.

5.                 (A)      Tenant shall promptly notify Lender of any default by Landlord under the Lease and of any act or omission of Landlord which would give Tenant the right to cancel or terminate the Lease or to claim a partial or total eviction.

(B)      In the event of a default by Landlord under the Lease which would give Tenant the right, immediately or after the lapse of a period of time, to cancel or terminate the Lease or to claim a partial or total eviction, or in the event of any other act or omission of Landlord which would give Tenant the right to cancel or terminate the Lease, Tenant shall not exercise such right (i) until Tenant has given written notice of such default, act or omission to Lender and (ii) unless Lender has failed, within sixty (60) days after Lender receives such notice, to cure or remedy the default, act or omission, or, if such default, act or omission shall be one which is not reasonably capable of being remedied by Lender within such sixty (60) day period, until a reasonable period for remedying such default, act or omission shall have elapsed following the giving of such notice and following the time when Lender shall have become entitled under the Security Instrument to remedy the same (which reasonable period shall in no event be less than the period to which Landlord would be entitled under the Lease or otherwise,

 

 


after similar notice, to effect such remedy), provided that Lender shall with due diligence give Tenant written notice of its intention to and shall commence and continue to, remedy such default, act or omission. If Lender cannot reasonably remedy a default, act or omission of Landlord until after Lender obtains possession of the Premises, Tenant may not terminate or cancel the Lease or claim a partial or total eviction by reason of such default, act or omission until the expiration of a reasonable period necessary for the remedy after Lender secures possession of the Premises through appointment of a receiver or foreclosure. To the extent Lender incurs any expenses or other costs in curing or remedying such default, act or omission, including, without limitation, attorneys' fees and disbursements, Lender shall be subrogated to Tenant's rights against Landlord.

(C)      Notwithstanding the foregoing, Lender shall have no obligation hereunder to remedy such default, act or omission.

6.         To the extent that the Lease shall entitle Tenant to notice of the existence of any mortgage and the identity of any mortgagee or any ground lessor, this Agreement shall constitute such notice to Tenant with respect to the Security Instrument and Lender.

7.         Upon and after the occurrence of a default under the Security Instrument, which is not cured after any applicable notice and/or cure periods, Lender shall be entitled, but not obligated, to exercise the claims, rights, powers, privileges and remedies of Landlord under the Lease and shall be further entitled to the benefits of, and to receive and enforce performance of, all of the covenants to be performed by Tenant under the Lease as though Lender were named therein as Landlord.

8.         Anything herein or in the Lease to the contrary notwithstanding, in the event that a Successor-Landlord shall acquire title to the Property or the portion thereof containing the Premises, Successor-Landlord shall have no obligation, nor incur any liability, beyond Successor-Landlord's then interest, if any, in the Property, and Tenant shall look exclusively to such interest, if any, of Successor-Landlord in the Property for the payment and discharge of any obligations imposed upon Successor-Landlord hereunder or under the Lease, and Successor-Landlord is hereby released or relieved of any other liability hereunder and under the Lease. Tenant agrees that, with respect to any money judgement which may be obtained or secured by Tenant against Successor-Landlord, Tenant shall look solely to the estate or interest owned by Successor-Landlord in the Property, and Tenant will not collect or attempt to collect any such judgement out of any other assets of Successor-Landlord.

9.         Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Lease, Tenant agrees for the benefit of Landlord and Lender that, except as permitted by, and fully in accordance with, applicable law, Tenant shall not generate, store, handle, discharge or maintain in, on or about any portion of the Property, any asbestos, polychlorinated biphenyls, or any other hazardous or toxic materials, wastes and substances which are defined, determined or identified as such (including, but not limited to, pesticides and petroleum products if they are defined, determined or identified as such) in any federal, state or local laws, rules or regulations (whether now existing or hereafter enacted or promulgated) or any judicial or administrative interpretation of any thereof, including any judicial or administrative interpretation of any thereof, including any judicial or administrative orders or judgments.

 

 


10.       If the Lease provides that Tenant is entitled to expansion space, Successor-Landlord shall have no obligation nor any liability for failure to provide such expansion space if a prior landlord (including, without limitation, Landlord), by reason of a lease or leases entered into by such prior landlord with other tenants of the Property, has precluded the availability of such expansion space.

11.       Except as specifically provided in this Agreement, Lender shall not, by virtue of this Agreement, the Security Instrument or any other instrument to which Lender may be a party, be or become subject to any liability or obligation to Tenant under the Lease or otherwise.

12.               (A)      Tenant acknowledges and agrees that this Agreement satisfies and complies in all respects with the provisions of Article 18 of the Lease and that this Agreement supersedes (but only to the extent inconsistent with) the provisions of such Article and any other provision of the Lease relating to the priority or subordination of the Lease and the interests or estates created thereby to the Security Instrument.

(B)      Tenant agrees to enter into a subordination, non-disturbance and attornment agreement with any lender which shall succeed Lender as lender with respect to the Property, or any portion thereof, provided such agreement is substantially similar to this Agreement. Tenant does herewith irrevocably appoint and constitute Lender as its true and lawful attorney-in-fact in its name, place and stead to execute such subordination, non-disturbance and attornment agreement, without any obligation on the part of Lender to do so. This power, being coupled with an interest, shall be irrevocable as long as the Indebtedness secured by the Security Instrument remains unpaid. Lender agrees not to exercise its rights under the preceding two sentences if Tenant promptly enters into the subordination, non-disturbance and attornment agreement as required pursuant to the first sentence of this subparagraph (B).

13.               (A)      Any notice required or permitted to be given by Tenant to Landlord shall be simultaneously given also to Lender, and any right to Tenant dependent upon notice shall take effect only after notice is so given. Performance by Lender shall satisfy any conditions of the Lease requiring performance by Landlord, and Lender shall have a reasonable time to complete such performance as provided in Paragraph 5 hereof.

(B)      All notices or other communications required or permitted to be given to Tenant or to Lender pursuant to the provisions of this Agreement shall be in writing and shall be deemed given only if mailed by United States registered mail, postage prepaid, or if sent by nationally recognized overnight delivery service (such as Federal Express or United States Postal Service Express Mail), addressed as follows: to Tenant, at the address first set forth above, Attention: Director of Facilities and Chief Financial Officer, with a copy to Lender, at the address first set forth above; or to such other address or number as such party may hereafter designate by notice delivered in accordance herewith. All such notices shall be deemed given three (3) business days after delivery to the United States Post office registry clerk if given by registered mail, or on the next business day after delivery to an overnight delivery courier.

14.       This Agreement may be modified only by an agreement in writing signed by the parties hereto, or their respective successors-in-interest. This Agreement shall inure to the

 

 


benefit of and be binding upon the parties hereto, and their respective successors and assigns. The term "Lender" shall mean the then holder of the Security Instrument. The term "Landlord" shall mean the then holder of the landlord's interest in the Lease. The term "person" shall mean an individual, joint venture, corporation, partnership, trust, limited liability company, unincorporated association or other entity. All references herein to the Lease shall mean the Lease as modified by this Agreement and to any amendments or modifications to the Lease which are consented to in writing by Lender. Any inconsistency between the Lease and the provisions of this Agreement shall be resolved, to the extent of such inconsistency, in favor of this Agreement.

 

15.

Tenant hereby represents to Lender as follows:

 

(a)

The Lease is in full force and effect and has not been further amended.

(b)       There has been no assignment of the Lease or subletting of any portion of the premises demised under the Lease.

(c)       There are no oral or written agreements or understandings between Landlord and Tenant relating to the premises demised under the Lease or the Lease transaction except as set forth in the Lease.

(d)       The execution of the Lease was duly authorized and the Lease is in full force and effect and to the best of Tenant's knowledge there exists no default (beyond any applicable grace period) on the part of either Tenant or Landlord under the Lease.

(e)       There has not been filed by or against nor to the best of the knowledge and belief of Tenant is there threatened against Tenant, any petition under the bankruptcy laws of the United States.

(f)        To the best of Tenant's knowledge, there is no present assignment, hypothecation or pledge of the Lease or rents accruing under the Lease by Landlord, other than pursuant to the Security Instrument.

16.       Whenever, from time to time, reasonably requested by Lender (but not more than three (3) times during any calendar year), Tenant shall execute and deliver to or at the direction of Lender, and without charge to Lender, one or more written certifications, in a form acceptable to Tenant, of all of the matters set forth in Paragraph 15 above, and any other information the Lender may reasonably require to confirm the current status of the Lease.

17.       BOTH TENANT AND LENDER HEREBY IRREVOCABLY WAIVE ALL RIGHT TO TRIAL BY JURY IN ANY ACTION, PROCEEDING OR COUNTERCLAIM ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THIS AGREEMENT.

18.       This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State in which the Property is located.

 

 


            IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have duly executed this Agreement as of the day and year first above written.

LENDER

LASALLE BANK, N.A., as Trustee in trust for Holders of Deutsche Mortgage & Asset Receiving Corporation, COMM 2006-FL12 Commercial Mortgage Pass-Through Certificates

     

 

By:

Bank of America N.A., as Sub-Servicer

     
    By:  
       
    Name:  
       
    Title:  


    TENANT
     
   

SHORETEL, INC.,

a California corporation

       
    By:  
       
    Name:  
       
    Title:  

 

AGREED AND CONSENTED TO:

CARR NP PROPERTIES, L.L.C.

 

By:  
   
Name:  
   
Title:  

 

 


 

STATE OF _______________________     )

 

) ss.

COUNTY OF ______________________

)

 

 

On ___________________, before me, _____________________________, personally appeared _____________________________________, personally known to me (or proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence) to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signature(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument.

 

WITNESS my hand and official seal.

 

_______________________________________________

Signature of Notary Public                              (Seal)

 

 

STATE OF _______________________

)

 

) ss.

COUNTY OF ______________________

)

 

 

On ___________________, before me, _____________________________, personally appeared _____________________________________, personally known to me (or proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence) to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signature(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument.

 

WITNESS my hand and official seal.

 

_______________________________________________

Signature of Notary Public                              (Seal)

 

 

 


STATE OF _______________________

)

 

) ss.

COUNTY OF ______________________

)

 

 

On ___________________, before me, _____________________________, personally appeared _____________________________________, personally known to me (or proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence) to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signature(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument.

 

WITNESS my hand and official seal.

 

_______________________________________________

Signature of Notary Public                              (Seal)

 

STATE OF _______________________

)

 

) ss.

COUNTY OF ______________________

)

 

 

On ___________________, before me, _____________________________, personally appeared _____________________________________, personally known to me (or proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence) to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signature(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument.

 

WITNESS my hand and official seal.

 

_______________________________________________

Signature of Notary Public                              (Seal)

 

 

 


SCHEDULE A

Legal Description of Property

All that real property situated in the City of Sunnyvale, County of Santa Clara, State of California, more particularly described as follows:

 


 

 


Exhibit 21

 

SUBSIDIARIES

 

Subsidiaries as of June   30, 2009

 

 

 

 

 

 

Name of Subsidiary

 

Jurisdiction of Incorporation

 

 

ShoreTel UK Limited

 

United Kingdom

 

 

ShoreTel GmbH

 

Germany

 

 

ShoreTel Pty. Limited

 

Australia

 

 

 


Exhibit 23.1

CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

We consent to the incorporation by reference in Registration Statement No. 333-144338 on Form S-8 of our report dated September 10, 2009, relating to the consolidated financial statements of ShoreTel, Inc. and subsidiaries (which expresses an unqualified opinion and includes an explanatory paragraph relating to the adoption of Financial Accounting Standards Board Interpretation No. 48, Accounting for Uncertainty in Income Taxes — an interpretation of FASB Statement No. 109, effective July 1, 2007), and our report dated September 10, 2009 relating to the effectiveness of ShoreTel Inc.’s internal control over financial reporting appearing in the Annual Report on Form 10-K of ShoreTel, Inc. for the year ended June 30, 2009.

/s/ Deloitte & Touche LLP

San Jose, California
September 10, 2009

71


Exhibit 31.1

CERTIFICATION OF PRINCIPAL EXECUTIVE OFFICER
PURSUANT TO EXCHANGE ACT RULES 13a-14(a) AND 15(d) -14(a), AS ADOPTED
PURSUANT TO SECTION 302 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

 

 

 

I, John W. Combs, certify that:

 

 

 

1.

I have reviewed this Annual Report on Form 10-K of ShoreTel, Inc.;

 

 

 

2.

Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 

 

 

3.

Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 

 

 

4.

The registrant’s other certifying officer(s) and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in the Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:

 

 

 

 

a.

Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

 

 

 

b.

Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

 

 

 

c.

Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

 

 

 

d.

Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 

 

 

5.

The registrant’s other certifying officer(s) and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of the registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

 

 

 

a.

All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 

 

 

 

b.

Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.


 

 

 

Date: September 10, 2009

 

/s/ JOHN W. COMBS

 


 

 

John W. Combs

 

 

Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer

 

 

(Principal Executive Officer)



Exhibit 31.2

CERTIFICATION OF PRINCIPAL FINANCIAL OFFICER
PURSUANT TO EXCHANGE ACT RULES 13a-14(a) AND 15(d) -14(a), AS ADOPTED
PURSUANT TO SECTION 302 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

 

 

 

I, Michael E. Healy, certify that:

 

 

 

1.

I have reviewed this Annual Report on Form 10-K of ShoreTel, Inc.;

 

 

 

2.

Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 

 

 

3.

Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 

 

 

4.

The registrant’s other certifying officer(s) and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in the Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:

 

 

 

 

a.

Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

 

 

 

b.

Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

 

 

 

c.

Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

 

 

 

d.

Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 

 

 

5.

The registrant’s other certifying officer(s) and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of the registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

 

 

 

a.

All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 

 

 

 

b.

Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.


 

 

 

Date: September 10, 2009

 

/s/ MICHAEL E. HEALY

 


 

 

Michael E. Healy

 

 

Chief Financial Officer

 

 

(Principal Accounting and Financial Officer)



Exhibit 32.1

CERTIFICATION OF CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER
PURSUANT TO 18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350, AS ADOPTED PURSUANT TO
SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

          I, John W. Combs, do hereby certify, pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, that, to my knowledge:

          The Annual Report on Form 10-K of ShoreTel, Inc. for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2009, as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “Report”), fully complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and

          The information contained in such Annual Report on Form 10-K fairly presents in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of ShoreTel, Inc.

 

 

 

Dated: September 10, 2009

By:

/s/ JOHN W. COMBS

 


 

Name: 

John W. Combs

 

Title:

Chairman, President and Chief Executive

 

 

Officer (Principal Executive Officer)



Exhibit 32.2

CERTIFICATION OF CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER
PURSUANT TO 18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350, AS ADOPTED
PURSUANT TO SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

          I, Michael E. Healy, do hereby certify, pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, that, to my knowledge:

          The Annual Report on Form 10-K of ShoreTel, Inc. for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2009, as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “Report”), fully complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and;

          The information contained in such Annual Report on Form 10-K fairly presents in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of ShoreTel, Inc.

 

 

 

Dated: September 10, 2009

By:

/s/ MICHAEL E. HEALY

 

 


 

Name: 

Michael E. Healy

 

Title:

Chief Financial Officer

 

 

(Principal Accounting and Financial Officer)